advertisement
ELB-02
Owner’s Manual
Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4-5.
For information on assembling the instrument, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.
EN
2 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators.
Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.
Water warning
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not open
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If you notice any abnormality
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord Location
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Assembly
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
DMI-5
1/2
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people.
Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
4 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
Handling caution
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Do not rest your legs or feet on the Expression Pedal or Pedal Box from the back of the instrument, or climb on the instrument, or put excessive weight on it.
Using the bench (If included)
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised use may result in accident or injury.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
DMI-5
2/2
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit.
(bottom_en_01)
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 5
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.
Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.
Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth.
Saving data
instrument will be overwritten by certain operations, such as Song playback, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, make
• A “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
The Registration Shift settings and Keyboard Percussion settings will be automatically saved to the Registration data when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, “” appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off without switching to another display or while
“” is shown in the display, otherwise the data will be lost.
• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto a spare USB flash drive as backup data.
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product.
* The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of
Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.
6 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About functions/data bundled with the instrument
• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Compatible Format
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 7
Congratulations!
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Electone!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
Online Member Product Registration
The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Music Rest
Insert the music rest into the slots as shown.
Dust Cover
Dust Cover
Power Cord
Bench
8 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.
Included Documents
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Provides overall explanations of the Electone functions.
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
This useful book helps you familiarize yourself with the Electone, giving you basic information on playing the instrument, including the proper playing posture, and providing helpful music scores which get you started playing the Electone using the preset Registration menu. This book also includes information on how to record your performance to the USB flash drive, and listen back to your recorded performances.
Online Materials (PDF)
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.
To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads website, select your country, enter “ELB-02” in the
Model Name box, then click [Search].
Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 9
Contents
PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 4
NOTICE ................................................................................ 6
Information............................................................................ 6
Congratulations! ................................................................... 8
Included Accessories............................................................ 8
About the Manuals................................................................ 9
Main Features..................................................................... 12
Panel Controls and Terminals 13
Overview............................................................................. 13
Front Panel ......................................................................... 14
Quick Introductory Guide 16
Power Supply ..................................................................... 16
Turning On/Off the Power................................................... 16
Adjusting the Volume ......................................................... 17
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display................................. 18
Using Headphones ............................................................ 19
Basic Operation 20
Registration Menu .............................................................. 20
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu.. 20
Registration Menu List ............................................... 22
Using the LCD display ....................................................... 25
Selecting from a list in the display ............................. 25
Selecting an item and changing its value.................. 25
Changing the Display Page ....................................... 26
Basic Operation.................................................................. 27
Selecting the Display Language................................ 27
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................... 27
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................... 28
Voices 29
Voices for Each Keyboard.................................................. 29
Voice Display...................................................................... 31
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons ............................ 33
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1.......................... 33
Adjusting the Voice volume ....................................... 34
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2................................. 36
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ......................... 37
Selecting Voices from the User buttons ............................. 39
Voice List ............................................................................ 42
Voice Controls and Effects 52
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ....................... 53
Rotary Speaker .......................................................... 60
Selecting from the panel .................................................... 61
Reverb........................................................................ 61
Sustain ....................................................................... 63
Effect List............................................................................ 64
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 68
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons ...................... 68
To select and play a rhythm...................................... 68
Operating the rhythm from the panel ........................ 71
Adjusting the tempo .................................................. 73
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb......................... 74
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons .......................... 75
Rhythm List ........................................................................ 77
Accompaniment ................................................................ 79
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) .. 82
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................................... 85
Keyboard Percussion ........................................................ 88
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion .................... 88
Preset Keyboard Percussion List .............................. 90
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
.............................................................................. 101
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion ............... 104
Kit Assign List.......................................................... 105
Registration Memory 111
Storing Registrations ....................................................... 111
Selecting Registrations.................................................... 113
Storing Registrations to Another Bank............................. 116
Deleting Banks ................................................................ 117
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive............ 118
Initializing Registration Memory....................................... 120
Registration Shift.............................................................. 121
Music Data Recorder (MDR) 127
Calling Up the MDR Display............................................ 127
Using the MDR Display ................................................... 128
Song icons .............................................................. 130
Connecting a USB Device............................................... 132
Using USB Flash Drives .......................................... 132
Formatting a USB Flash Drive ......................................... 133
Selecting a Song ............................................................. 134
Recording ........................................................................ 138
Recording................................................................ 138
Re-recording (Retry) ............................................... 140
Recording Each Part Separately............................. 140
Punch-in Recording ................................................ 143
Changing the Song/Folder Name.................................... 144
Saving Registrations........................................................ 147
Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song
.............................................................................. 149
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit ................... 151
Deleting Registrations ............................................. 152
Recalling Recorded Registrations................................... 154
Loading Registrations ............................................. 154
Playing Back a Song ....................................................... 155
Playing Back Selected Parts ................................... 157
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ........................... 157
10 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Changing the Tempo ............................................... 158
Repeat Playback...................................................... 159
Playing Back XG Songs ........................................... 160
Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc. ........................... 161
Copy......................................................................... 161
Song Delete/Folder Delete....................................... 164
Creating folders ....................................................... 165
Converting to XG format .......................................... 166
Checking the Remaining Memory............................ 168
Audio 169
Recording Your Performance as Audio............................ 169
Playing Back Audio Files.................................................. 172
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ............................ 173
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch ................. 174
Deleting the File / Changing the File Name ............. 176
Footswitches 177
Right Footswitch ............................................................... 177
Left Footswitch ................................................................. 177
Transpose and Pitch Controls 181
Connections 182
Accessory Jacks and Controls......................................... 182
Connection Examples — External Devices...................... 184
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
............................................................................... 185
Controlling the Electone from an External Device ... 185
Connection with Computer............................................... 186
Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal ......................... 186
MIDI .................................................................................. 187
What is MIDI? ........................................................... 187
MIDI Messages of the Electone ............................... 188
MIDI Channels ......................................................... 189
MIDI Control ..................................................................... 190
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.......................................... 192
Wireless LAN settings .............................................. 192
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ............................... 198
Initialize the wireless LAN settings........................... 200
Glossary of Terms .................................................... 201
Appendix 202
Assembly Instructions ...................................................... 202
Troubleshooting................................................................ 206
Specifications ................................................................... 209
Index................................................................................. 211
Quick Introductory
Guide
1
Basic Operation
2
Voices
3 Voice Controls and Effects
4 Rhythm/Keyboard
Percussion
5
Registration
Memory
6
Music Data
Recorder (MDR)
7
Audio
8
Footswitches
9 Transpose and
Pitch Controls
10
Connections
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 11
Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 601 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs.
Richly textured, AWM Voices, Touch functions and High Quality
Digital Effects
The ELB-02 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—540 altogether—created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system, including special Super Articulation Voices, which realistically recreate characteristic instrument sounds. With highly playable keyboards featuring authentic touch response—with Initial Touch and After Touch functions—you can play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there is a wide variety of effect types that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the
Voices.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment
The exceptionally wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) —such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and
Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments.
Keyboard Percussion
This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more.
Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder
The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances to a USB flash drive, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the
MDR allows you to copy a Song from one USB flash drive to another, letting you archive your important recordings and Registration data.
Audio Recording
You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo
WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your own CDs to enjoy as well.
12 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
Overview
Front Panel
[AUX IN] jack
AUX OUT [L/L+R]/
[R] jack
[PHONES] jack
Speaker
Music Rest
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
MIDI terminals
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
[USB TO HOST] terminal
[AC IN] jack
For connecting a power
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
Left Footswitch
Pedalboard
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 13
Front Panel
Panel Setup (Panel Settings)
By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings such as selecting a Voice or Style, tuning the pitch, and so on. These settings of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual.
[VOICE SECTION 2] button
Switches between Voice
MUSIC DATA RECORDER (MDR)
Allows recording and playback of your keyboard performances, and lets you store Registration data for
LEAD VOICE
Selects the Lead Voices for Upper Keyboard
(page 29). Also available on the Lower
Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on.
LCD display
Shows the current settings of the
UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE
Selects the Voices for Upper Keyboard
REGISTRATION MENU
Selects convenient Registrations, which let you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings, allowing you to start playing with all appropriate
sounds pre-selected (page 20).
SUSTAIN buttons
REVERB buttons
TEMPO buttons
Adjusts the speed of the rhythm
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
Turns Keyboard
Percussion On or
RHYTHM
Sets the rhythm
C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3
RHYTHM CONTROL
Starts and stops the rhythm, and adds changes to the
Tempo, Bar/Beat display
Shows the current tempo or position in the
LOWER
KEYBOARD VOICE
Selects the Voices for Lower Keyboard
PEDAL VOICE
Selects the Voices for Pedalboard
(page 30). Also available on the
Lower Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on.
14 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Page buttons
Selects the Page of the display
Data Control [A] –
[D] buttons
Selects items and changes the values/ settings in the
DATA CONTROL dial
Selects the setting or value in the display
[9-16] button
[MEMORY] button
REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons
For registering and recalling panel
[DISABLE] button
MASTER VOLUME dial
Adjusts the overall
D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6
D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5
Display Select
[VOICE DISPLAY] button
[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button
[FOOTSWITCH] button
[AUDIO] button
[UTILITY] button
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
For connecting a
USB flash drive
[P] (Standby/On) switch
Turns the instrument’s power on or sets it to
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 15
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Power Supply
WARNING
Use only the supplied power cord.
CAUTION
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
NOTE
When disconnecting the power cord, first turn off the power, then follow this procedure in reverse order.
Connect the plugs of the power cord in the order shown in the illustration.
1
[AC IN] jack
2
AC Outlet
The shape of the plug and outlet differs depending on your locale.
2
Turning On/Off the Power
1
Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial counter-clockwise.
NOTICE
Do not press any keys or buttons while turning the power on. Doing so may cause the Electone to malfunction or data loss.
2
Press the [ P ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
16 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the other on the LCD display:
3
This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings
for each Voice section (page 31).
Press and hold the [ turn the power off.
P] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to
CAUTION
Even when the [ P]
(Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
3
Adjusting the Volume
1
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument.
CAUTION
Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
Decreases the volume Increases the volume
2
Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play.
Maximum volume Minimum volume
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 17
4
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display
You can adjust the contrast of the display.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display.
Since the contrast setting is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown.
2
Press the [C] button corresponding to “LCD CONTRAST.”
“LCD CONTRAST” is selected and highlighted.
NOTICE
The LCD contrast setting is automatically saved when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off.
3
Adjust the LCD contrast with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding button.
You can set the value between -5 – +5.
18 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Using Headphones
To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard stereo phone jack).
CAUTION
Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
Standard stereo phone plug
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 19
1
Basic Operation
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See
1
Registration Menu
The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the
Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices,
Pedal Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Registration Menu button [0] includes a variety of basic Registrations, especially for practicing, and the other buttons [1] –
[5] include Registrations in various music genres for playing your favorite types of music. These give you a wide palette of Registrations to choose from, both for practice purposes and for freely playing in virtually any music style or genre.
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
1
Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Page 01
Page 02
Pages 01, 02
Pages 01, 02
Pages 01, 02
Pages 01, 02
Basic
Kids
Simple
Pops & Rock
Dance & Ballad
Jazz & Latin
Symphony & World
2
From this main category, select the specific Registration you want to use.
Each Registration Menu button actually contains many Registrations. Select the desired Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select Registration by using the [A] and [D] buttons located at the immediate right side of the LCD.
20 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Changing Pages
Page buttons
REGISTRATION MENU buttons [1] – [5] contain two display pages: “01” and
“02,” each of which contain two different sets of Registrations. Page 01 features the same Registration Menu as that of the ELB-01, while Page 02 features new
Registration Menus for the ELB-02. From each of the 01 and 02 pages, select the desired Registration.
3
Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
1
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 21
1
Registration Menu List
[ 0 ] BASIC
01 Simple 1 St/St
02 Simple 2 St/Hr
03 Simple 3 Cl/St
04 Simple 4 Cl/Hr
05 Simple 5 Tp/St
06 Simple 6 Tp/Hr
07 Simple 7 Ob/St
08 Simple 8 Ob/Bsn
09 Simple 9 Fl/St
10 Simple 10 Fl/Cl
11 Simple 11 Cl/Cl
12 Simple 12 Pf/Pf
13 Simple 13 Cl/Bsn
14 Sound Effect 1
15 Sound Effect 2
16 Sound Effect 3
17 Sound Effect 4
18 Sound Effect 5
19 Sound Effect 6
20 Sound Effect 7
21 Sound Effect 8
22 Sound Effect 9
23 Sound Effect 10
24 Sound Effect 11
25 Sound Effect 12
26 Sound Effect 13
27 Sound Effect 14
28 Sound Effect 15
29 Sound Effect 16
30 StCombi 1 St/St
31 StCombi 2 St/Hr
32 StCombi 3 St/Br
33 StCombi 4 St/CB
34 StCombi 5 Oct Hi
35 StCombi 6 Oct Lo
36 StCombi 7 Soft
37 StCombi 8 SftOct
38 StCombi 9 Hard
39 StCombi 10HrdOct
40 StCombi 11 St+WW
41 StCombi 12 St+Br
42 StCombi 13 Pizz
43 StCombi 14 Trem
44 StCombi 15 Vn/Vc
45 StCombi 16 Vn/Pz
46 BrCombi 1 Tp/St
47 BrCombi 2 Tp/Hr
48 BrCombi 3 Tp/Tb
49 BrCombi 4 Br/Hr
50 BrCombi 5 Br/Br
51 BrCombi 6 Oct
52 BrCombi 7 Br/CB
53 BrCombi 8Br/Timp
54 BrCombi 9 Br+Xyl
55 WWCombi 1 Fl/St
56 WWCombi 2 Fl/Cl
57 WWCombi 3 Fl/Hp
58 WWCombi 4 Ob/St
59 WWCombi 5 Ob/Bsn
60 WWCombi 6 Ob/Piz
61 WWCombi 7 Cl/St
62 WWCombi 8 Cl/Hr
63 WWCombi 9 Cl/Piz
64 WWCombi 10Sax/Pf
65 Woodwind Ens 1
66 Woodwind Ens 2
67 Woodwind Ens 3
68 Woodwind Ens 4
69 Woodwind Ens 5
70 Woodwind Ens 6
71 Woodwind Ens 7
72 Decay 1 Piano
73 Decay 2 Harpsi
74 Decay 3 E.Piano
75 Decay 4 Guitar
76 Decay 5 E.Guitar
77 Decay 6 Xylophne
78 Decay 7 Glocken
79 Decay 8 Harp
80 Hold 1 PipeOrgan
81 Hold 2 JazzOrgan
82 Hold 3 Accordion
83 Hold 4 Recorder
84 Synth 1
85 Synth 2
86 Synth 3
87 Synth 4
88 Synth 5
89 Comping Rock
90 Comping Jazz 1
91 Comping Jazz 2
92 Comping Classic1
93 Comping Classic2
94 Comping Classic3
95 Comping Classic4
[ 1 ] KIDS, SIMPLE
Page 01 KIDS
01 Simple 8Beat 1
02 Simple 8Beat 2
03 Light Step
04 Sunny Pop
05 Kids March 1
06 Kids March 2
07 Kids March 3
08 Synth Rock
09 SymphonicMarch 1
10 SymphonicMarch 2
11 Bluegrass
12 Sea Carnival
13 Basic Waltz
14 Brass Ensemble
15 Pure Waltz
16 Rococo Ensemble
17 Pop Cha Cha
18 Comical Rumba
19 Comical Samba
20 Toy Orchestra
21 Charleston
22 Winter Swing
23 Snow Waltz 1
24 Snow Waltz 2
25 Alpine Polka *A
26 Alpine Polka *B
27 Alpine Polka *C
28 Alpine Polka *D
29 Dream Ballad *A
30 Dream Ballad *B
31 Dream Ballad *C
32 Dream Ballad *D
33 Pops Orchestra*A
34 Pops Orchestra*B
35 Pops Orchestra*C
36 Pops Orchestra*D
37 Kids On Stage *A
38 Kids On Stage *B
39 Kids On Stage *C
40 Kids On Stage *D
41 Galaxy March *A
42 Galaxy March *B
43 Galaxy March *C
44 Galaxy March *D
45 SE *A
46 SE *B
47 SE *C
48 SE *D
Page 02 SIMPLE
01 SimpleReg Strs 1
02 SimpleReg Strs 2
03 SimpleReg Orch 1
04 SimpleReg Orch 2
05 SimpleReg Orch 3
06 SimpleReg Pops 1
07 SimpleReg Pops 2
08 SimpleReg Latin
09 SimpleReg Jazz 1
10 SimpleReg Jazz 2
11 SimpleReg Jazz 3
12 SimpleReg Organ
13 BrassBandMarch*A
14 BrassBandMarch*B
15 Orchestra March
16 6/8 MarchingBand
17 6/8 MarchingKids
18 Light Waltz
19 OrchestraWaltz*A
20 OrchestraWaltz*B
21 OrchestraWaltz*C
22 OrchestraWaltz*D
23 8Beat Synth Pop
24 8Beat Pop
25 Pop Shuffle
26 R&B Shuffle
27 Rock
28 Rock Shuffle
29 Rock Pop Ballad
30 Funk
31 Dance Pop
32 Disco Pop
33 R&B E.Piano Bld
34 R&B Piano Ballad
35 8Beat Ballad
36 8Beat OrchBallad
37 3/4 Pop Ballad
38 6/8 Pop Ballad
39 Big Band King *A
40 Big Band King *B
41 Big Band King *C
42 Big Band Swing
43 Jazz Session
44 Fusion Samba
45 Pop Samba
46 Simple BossaNova
47 Mambo
48 Rumba
49 Cls Organ Chapel
50 Cls Organ Hall
51 RockOrgan Ballad
52 R&B Rock Organ
53 Organ Combo
54 6/8 Organ Ballad
55 Soul Jazz Organ
56 Pop Organ 60s
57 Toy Organ
58 Theatre Organ NY
59 Nostalgic Organ
22 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
[ 2 ] POPS&ROCK
Page 01
01 Dynamic 8Beat
02 NY Ballad
03 British Pop
04 8Beat Modern
05 Rock Band
06 Detroit Pop
07 Techno Pop
08 Sheriff Reggae
09 Rock & Roll
10 Power Rock
11 60s Guitar Rock
12 Unplugged
13 Motor City
14 Lovely Shuffle
15 Gospel Shuffle
16 Joyful Gospel
17 Frankly Soul
18 Soul
19 Gospel
20 6/8 Soul
21 Hit Pop
22 New Country
23 Eternal Pop
24 Ground Beat
25 Bounce Pop *A
26 Bounce Pop *B
27 Bounce Pop *C
28 Bounce Pop *D
29 Blues Jam *A
30 Blues Jam *B
31 Blues Jam *C
32 Blues Jam *D
33 EvergreenWaltz*A
34 EvergreenWaltz*B
35 EvergreenWaltz*C
36 EvergreenWaltz*D
37 16Beat Pop *A
38 16Beat Pop *B
39 16Beat Pop *C
40 16Beat Pop *D
41 Top Gear Rock *A
42 Top Gear Rock *B
43 Top Gear Rock *C
44 Top Gear Rock *D
45 Southern Pop *A
46 Southern Pop *B
47 Southern Pop *C
48 Southern Pop *D
Page 02
01 70s Easy Pop
02 BoysGuitarBallad
03 Soul Pop
04 70s Top Duo
05 Daydream Shuffle
06 Oldies Pop
07 EuroPop Folklore
40 Pop Rock Band
41 Shuffle PopPiano
42 Contemp Country
43 Smooth Country
44 Xmas Shuffle
45 Snowy Christmas
46 Pretty Rock
47 Ultra Rock
48 Rock Graffiti
49 Casual Rock
50 Rookie Rock
51 Happy Rock
52 J-Pop Idol Rock
53 J-Pop Band Rock
54 Spirit Pop
55 Sweet Love Pop
56 Summer Pop
57 Shaky Dance
58 J-Pop Piano Band
59 J-Pop Boys
60 J-PopShuffleBeat
61 J-Pop BandBallad
62 Breezy Ballad
63 HeroRanger Theme
64 Sunset Pop
65 Funky Punch *A
66 Funky Punch *B
67 GlxyBattleship*A
08 Discotheque Rock
09 Slow Hand Ballad
10 Sweet AC Ballad
11 70s PrimeTime TV
12 Crossover Funk
13 Joyful Gospel #2
14 Gospel Groove
15 Worship Shuffle
16 Worship 16beat
17 Soulful Wonder
18 Lovely & Soulful
19 Danceable Funk
20 Bright Pop Rock
21 AmericanHardRock
22 Power Rock 80s
23 USA RockStandard
24 Seaside Rock
25 70s Folk Rock
26 Alternative Rock
27 Alternative6/8Rk
28 Highway Rock
29 Funky Rock&Roll
30 Synth Pop Rock
31 Power Synth Rock
32 RockGuitarBallad
33 Pop Rock & Roll
34 Back To The 60s
35 Dancing Boogie
36 6/8 Shuffle Rock
37 Shuffle BoysRock
38 Shuffle Pop Rock
39 Shfl Rock Ballad
68 GlxyBattleship*B
69 J-Pop Anime *A
70 J-Pop Anime *B
71 70s Honey
72 70s Hero
73 DBZ *A
74 DBZ *B
75 DBZ *C
76 DBZ *D
[ 3 ] DANCE&BALLAD
Page 01
01 Organ Ballad
02 Dramatic Ballad
03 Love Ballad
04 Smooth Lead
05 Pop Ballad
06 Guitar Ballad
07 Acoustic Ballad
08 Healing Guitar
09 Chillout
10 Sweetheart 1
11 Sweetheart 2
12 Slow & Easy
13 Euro Trance
14 6/8 Trance
15 Cool Hip Hop
16 Latin House
17 Dance Beat
18 Euro Dance Pop
19 UK Pop
20 Jive
21 Disco Queen
22 Disco Soul
23 Pop Disco
24 Hot Disco
25 Ibiza *A
26 Ibiza *B
27 Ibiza *C
28 Ibiza *D
29 Power House *A
30 Power House *B
31 Power House *C
32 Power House *D
33 Dance Latino *A
34 Dance Latino *B
35 Dance Latino *C
36 Dance Latino *D
37 Twilight Disco*A
38 Twilight Disco*B
39 Twilight Disco*C
40 Twilight Disco*D
41 Love Song *A
42 Love Song *B
43 Love Song *C
44 Love Song *D
45 Movie Ballad *A
46 Movie Ballad *B
47 Movie Ballad *C
48 Movie Ballad *D
Page 02
01 R&B Pop Ballad
02 R&B Soul Ballad
03 R&B Cool Ballad
04 Cool AC
05 Sweet Chart Hits
06 Sweet SlowBallad
07 YourPiano Ballad
08 Sweet EP Ballad
09 J-Pop EasyBallad
10 Sweet Sax Ballad
11 Sweet R&B Ballad
12 Lovers R&B
13 Sentimental Bld
14 Tears Ballad
15 Glory Ballad
16 Unplugged Ballad
17 SentimentalMovie
18 BeautyCinema Bld
19 CinemaSympho Bld
20 Enka Ballad
21 6/8 Enka Shuffle
22 Christmas Ballad
23 Disco Hits 70s
24 70s Disco Night
25 Euro Pop Disco
26 Synth Disco
27 Ballroom Disco
28 Syn DancePop 80s
29 Dirty Dance Beat
30 Fortune Disco
31 Girls Pop 48 *A
32 Girls Pop 48 *B
33 Shiny Girls Pop
34 Share The Peace
35 DanceAndRhythm*A
36 DanceAndRhythm*B
37 DanceAndRhythm*C
38 DanceAndRhythm*D
39 Girls Techno
40 Candy Pop Techno
41 Dancing Platform
42 Dance Beat EX.
43 Club Beat
44 Electronica Beat
45 Kool Garage
46 Electronic Dance
47 New Age Chillout
48 Eurobeat Party
49 Ibiza Trance
50 Casual Trance
51 Trance Party
52 WonderTranceShfl
1
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 23
1
[ 4 ] JAZZ&LATIN
Page 01
01 Blow On Sax
02 Sax Ensemble
03 Moonlight
04 Big Band
05 Clarinet Swing
06 Jazz Combo
07 Medium Jazz
08 Organ Session
09 Guitar Combo
10 Tender Ballad
11 Jazz Waltz
12 Five-Four
13 Big Band Samba
14 Mambo Brass
15 Mambo Tenor
16 Montuno
17 Bossa Nova
18 Pop Bossa
19 Sweet Rumba
20 Beguine
21 Cha Cha Cha
22 Mellow Groove
23 Modern R&B
24 Dixieland Jazz
25 Jungle Drum *A
26 Jungle Drum *B
27 Jungle Drum *C
28 Jungle Drum *D
29 Jazz Club *A
30 Jazz Club *B
31 Jazz Club *C
32 Jazz Club *D
33 Afro Session *A
34 Afro Session *B
35 Afro Session *C
36 Afro Session *D
37 ChaCha Grandee*A
38 ChaCha Grandee*B
39 ChaCha Grandee*C
40 ChaCha Grandee*D
41 3/4 Fast Jazz *A
42 3/4 Fast Jazz *B
43 3/4 Fast Jazz *C
44 3/4 Fast Jazz *D
45 Twilight Sax *A
46 Twilight Sax *B
47 Twilight Sax *C
48 Twilight Sax *D
Page 02
01 Big Band Tutti
02 Alto Sax Combo
03 Jazz Combo Fast
04 Jazz Combo 66
05 The Big Band *A
06 The Big Band *B
07 Guitar JazzCombo
08 The Swing Jazz
09 New Orleans Jazz
10 Ragtime Band
11 Funky Cat Groove
12 Afro Cuban Jazz
13 Guitar JazzWaltz
14 Sax Jazz Waltz
15 Swing Steps
16 Swing Chorus
17 Relax Swing
18 Urban Lounge
19 Broadway Tap
20 Brazilian Bossa
21 Lounge BossaNova
22 8Beat Bossa Nova
23 Pop Bossa Nova
24 Tiny Bossa Nova
25 Cafe Samba
26 BitterSweetLatin
27 Latin Rock
28 DanceBeatLatin*A
29 DanceBeatLatin*B
30 Pop Accordion
31 Sweet Bomba
32 Orquesta Salsa
33 New Flamenco
34 Jummin' Reggae
35 RumbaAndTheCity
36 French Caribbean
37 Caribbean Sea
[ 5 ] SYMPHONY&WORLD
Page 01
01 Fanfare
02 String Orchestra
03 Romantic Violin
04 Baroque
05 Flute & Harp
06 Serenade
07 Fast March
08 Wild West
09 Vienna Waltz
10 Polka
11 Chanson Club
12 Theatre Organ
13 Flamenco
14 Pop Flamenco
15 Mexican Dance
16 Mariachi
17 Celtic Dance
18 Folk Step
19 Italiano
20 Musette
21 Country
22 Hawaiian
23 Chinese Nocturne
24 Japanese Sound
25 OrchestraMarch*A
26 OrchestraMarch*B
27 OrchestraMarch*C
28 OrchestraMarch*D
29 Pasodoble *A
30 Pasodoble *B
31 Pasodoble *C
32 Pasodoble *D
33 Tango *A
34 Tango *B
35 Tango *C
36 Tango *D
37 Show Time *A
38 Show Time *B
39 Show Time *C
40 Show Time *D
41 Majestic Sound*A
42 Majestic Sound*B
43 Majestic Sound*C
44 Majestic Sound*D
45 OrchestraSwing*A
46 OrchestraSwing*B
47 OrchestraSwing*C
48 OrchestraSwing*D
Page 02
01 Orch Full Unit
02 String Classic
03 Sweet Pizzicato
04 Baroque Symphony
05 Nostalgic Green
06 New Year March
07 Wind Orchestra
08 BrassBand Parade
09 Choral No.9
10 Angel Voices
11 Beat Classic
12 Can Can Pop
13 Elegant Waltz
14 Chorus Waltz
15 Love Waltz
16 Fantasy World
17 Movie Pirates
18 Chorus Symphony
19 Hollywood Sound
20 Super Showtune
21 TV DramaTrack *A
22 TV DramaTrack *B
23 Movie Symphonic
24 Movie Soundtrack
25 Yoo-Hoo Polka
26 Pop Polka
27 Funny Polka
28 Casual Polka
29 Country Town
30 Tango Band
31 Turkish Pops
32 Oriental Dance
33 Celtic Beat
34 Celtic Waltz
35 Trad Irish Pipe
36 Irish Ballad
37 ChinaSweetBallad
38 ChinaRomanticBld
39 China Dance Beat
40 China Kung Fu
41 China Trad Song
42 China Trad Dance
24 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Using the LCD display
Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button on the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding button in the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently perform various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons
(located at the immediate right side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at the right of the [A] – [D] buttons).
Selecting from a list in the display
Scroll bar
In general (for example, for Voices and Rhythms), there are too many selectable items and menus to all be shown in the display. In such a list display, scroll bar will be shown at the right side of the display. When the scroll bar is shown in the display, you can scroll through the display vertically by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial and select the desired menu.
When the marks [ U] and [D] are shown at the right side of the scroll bar in the display, you can scroll the display and select the desired one by using the [A] or [D] buttons.
Selecting an item and changing its value
1.
Select the item
2.
Change the value/setting
In many displays (other than lists), items or parameters, such as Volume and Reverb, are shown in vertical order, with the corresponding values/settings at the immediate right of the items. In this type of display, you can select (highlight) the item by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in the example above, the [B] button, which corresponding to the Reverb setting), letting you change the value/setting with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding button (in this case, the [B] button).
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 25
1
1
Changing the Display Page
Page buttons
Display name Page
Shows the number of pages and the current page. The current page is shown with a long bar (_), while other available pages are shown as dots (.).
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3
Page buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available), with the currently selected page number appearing at the top right of the LCD. Use the [ R] button to select the next page, and [L] to select the previous page.
Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1.
26 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Basic Operation
Selecting the Display Language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel.
The Utility display appears. Since the language is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown.
1
2
Press the [A] button to select the corresponding language then successively press the same button to switch the value between
Japanese and English.
NOTICE
The language setting is automatically saved when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off.
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)
All current settings including Registration Memory (in all banks), Display language and display contrast settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to a USB flash drive.
Note that the operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings,
which can be initialized on page 200.
Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive
Reference Page
1
Turn off the power.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 27
1
2
While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on.
3
Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears.
Confirming the Version of Your Electone
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
2
Select Page 8 by using the Page buttons.
The Version appears in the display.
28 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the
Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the
Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
Voices for the Upper
Keyboard
Voices for the Lower
Keyboard
Voices for
Pedalboard
1
Voices for Each Keyboard
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead
Voice 2. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from the panel’s “UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section, while the Lead Voice 1 and
Lead Voice 2 can be selected from the “LEAD VOICE 1/2” section.
Reference Page
• Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section
• [TO LOWER D/SOLO]
Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1 and Upper
Keyboard 2
Voices for the Lead Voice 1 and Lead Voice 2
The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or most prominent part in an orchestra or band.
As the default, only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 sounds when you play the Upper
Keyboard.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 29
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s “LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section.
Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 and Lower Keyboard 2
2
Reference Page
[TO LOWER U] button
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s “PEDAL VOICE 1/2” section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound.
Voices for the Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2
30 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Voice Display
The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not by changing the On/Off status in the display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects the
Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.)
The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the Page buttons at the top right of the display.
The Voice Display shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section and their On/Off status.
Voice Display [Page 1] Voice Display [Page 2]
Voice name On/Off status Voice name On/Off status
On/Off status of the Voices
You can set whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the on/off status in the Voice display. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the Voice section you want to change to alternate between on and off.
Page 1 and page 2
Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1 and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice section. For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for checking the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2.
Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button at the top left on the panel switch between the Voice sections, and the corresponding display will be shown.
Reference Page
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section
NOTE
Selecting Page 1 or 2 turns the [VOICE SECTION 2] button off or on.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 31
2
2
When Voice section 1 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button is off)
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice 1
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1).
When Voice section 2 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button lights up)
Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 2
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Pedal Voice 2
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2).
Voice Display [Page 3]
Reference Page
For selecting the desired Bank to which you can store the Registration, or from
which you can recall the Registration. For details, refer to page 116.
32 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice section 1 are given
here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page 37.
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1
1
Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is off.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.
Reference Page
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section
Lamp is off, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1.
2
When the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, you can select a Voice for Voice section 1 (in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s UPPER
KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.
2
Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/
2 section.
For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.
The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and they will be shown in the display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 33
3
Select the Voice in the Voice menu display by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.
2
Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the
Upper keyboard above.
Adjusting the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The controls have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Increasing the volume
Decreasing the volume
NOTE
Depending on the volume value (set in the Voice
Condition display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position.
NOTE
Although setting the on/off status of the Voice section to off in the Voice Display results in a Volume value of 0 in the Voice Condition display, it will change to on when you increase the
Volume value in the Voice
Condition display or by using the panel Volume buttons, even if you have set it to off.
Setting the Volume in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up the Voice Condition display.
The Volume is displayed in the top of the Voice Condition display Page 1. Press the
[A] button to select the “VOLUME” item, then adjust the volume by using the DATA
CONTROL dial. The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24.
Voice Condition Display [Page 1]
34 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button.
Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays.
Voice Menu Display Voice Condition Display
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan,
Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 35
2
4
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2
This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different
Voice in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound, playing the two Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice
section 1, see page 33. The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice
(Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for Voice section 2.
NOTE
Switching between Voice sections 1 and 2 has no effect on which Voice is sounded by the keyboard.
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2
To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION
2] button on the panel.
For the Voice section which is indicated as “1/2” on the panel, you can select the
Voice from each section by switching between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the
[VOICE SECTION 2] button.
Each press of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button alternates between the available Voice sections 1 and 2. When the button lamp is off, Voice section 1 is available. When the button lamp is lit, Voice section 2 is available.
Voice Section 1
([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off)
Voice Section 2
([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit)
36 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Since Voice section 1 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard
Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1.
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1
Lead
Voice 1
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1
Pedal
Voice 1
Since Voice section 2 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard
Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2.
Upper Keyboard
Voice 2
Lead
Voice 2
Lower Keyboard
Voice 2
Pedal
Voice 2
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2
Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout all Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard
Voice 2, are given here.
1
Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp on, and select Voice section 2.
Lamp is lit, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 2.
Now, you can select a Voice for Upper Keyboard Voice 2 from the panel’s
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.
2
Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section.
Indicates Upper Keyboard
Voice 2 is selected.
3
Select the Voice you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 37
2
4
Press one of the Volume buttons of the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2.
2
Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 will produce no sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To play the Voices for Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of the selected Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, the Volume buttons of the
Voice sections can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section
2.
Now set the Voices for Lead Voice 2, Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 2 above.
Reference Page
If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to minimum by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel while the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, or set the status to Off in the
Voice Display [Page 2].
NOTE
Even when the To Lower function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will be controlled by the Sustain settings for the Pedal Voices.
NOTE
Even when the To Lower function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will sound monophonic.
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the TO LOWER button in each section is on.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
When this function is on, the Lead Voice 1 and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the
Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.
38 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About the Solo function
NOTE
The [TO LOWER D/SOLO] button functions as Solo when the [VOICE SECTION
2] button lights up, and function as TO LOWER when the [VOICE SECTION 2] is off.
The ELS series Electone features an exclusive Solo function letting you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard
Voices. This Electone can playback Songs containing the Solo function by using the
MDR function. After playing back such a Song, [TO LOWER D/SOLO] button may light. In this status, Lead Voice 2 will not sound, so turn off the [TO LOWER D/SOLO] button.
5
Selecting Voices from the User buttons
This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in
“Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.
The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any internal voices can be selected from these buttons.
NOTE
The Voices S-Violin, S-Flute,
S-Alto Sax and S-Irish Pipe can be used only for Voice sections Lead Voices 1/2 and Pedal Voices 1/2. These four Voices cannot be selected for Voice sections
Upper Keyboard Voices 1/2 and Lower Keyboard Voices
1/2, and are not shown in the display.
2
User buttons
The User buttons have two basic uses:
For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from any of the other Voice Menu pages, and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (twelve Voice Menu pages) that make up the Upper Voice section.
For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User button in the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User button in the same section.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 39
2
For example, select Pedal Voice “5: Contrabass 5” for User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1.
1
Make sure that the lamp of [Voice section 2] is off.
If the [Voice section 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.
Lamp is off, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1.
2
Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections (in this case, User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section).
The name of the selected category is displayed.
Voice category
3
Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons (in this case, “CONTRABASS”).
40 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Directly selecting the category
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and simultaneously press the desired Voice button.
1
. While holding down the User button...
2
. Press the Voice button.
4
Select “5: CONTRABASS 5” by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Now you’ve assigned Contrabass 5 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice sections just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 41
2
6
Voice List
This list describes the preset Voices.
• Super Articulation Voices
Voices having the prefix “S-” at the beginning of the name. For details on the effects that are produced by playing the Super Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
“AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology.
• Auto Articulation Voices
Voices which produce effects by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO ARTICULATION
playing the Auto Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
Portamento or glissando effect will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or octave in legato with the Voice “S-Violin” or “S-Alto Sax.”
Category No.
STRINGS/
VIOLIN
01
02
03
04
05
06
32
33
34
35
36
27
28
29
30
31
37
38
39
40
41
22
23
24
25
26
17
18
19
20
21
12
13
14
15
16
07
08
09
10
11
Voice Name
Strings 1
Spiccato Strings
Strings1 & 6
Strings2 & Viola
Strings3 & 4
Strings6&Violin4
Violin4 & Cello
Octave Strings 1
Octave Strings 2
Octave Strings 3
Violin 1
Violin 2
Violin 3
Violin 4
Violin 5
Violin 6
Pizzicato Violin
Viola
Cello 1
Cello 2
S-Violin
Strings 2
Strings 3
Strings 4
Strings 5
Strings 6
Strings 7
Strings 8
Strings 9
Strings 10
Strings 11
Slow Strings
Chamber Strs 1
Chamber Strs 2
Chamber Strs 3
Chamber Strs 4
Pizzicato Strs 1
Pizzicato Strs 2
Pizzicato Strs 3
Pizzicato Strs 4
Tremolo Strings
*1
*2
Description
These Voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking sounds, bow scratching noises and deep resonant sounds.
This string sound features a gentle initial attack.
These string ensembles are for chamber music.
These are sounds of stringed instruments being plucked by finger instead of being bowed.
This is the sound of tremolo strings on a single note.
This is the sound of lightly bouncing a bow on the strings of a stringed instrument.
This is a combination of Strings 1 and Strings 6.
This is a combination of Strings 2 and Viola.
This is a combination of Strings 3 and Strings 4.
This is a combination of Strings 6 and Violin 4.
This is a combination of Violin 4 and Cello.
These are string ensemble sounds played in octaves.
These deeply expressive sounds are suitable not only for classical music but, also jazz and country & western. Tonal variations include bright Voices and soft ones.
This is the sound of a violin being plucked by finger.
This instrument is slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. It is used for mid-range parts.
These are warm and deep sounds.
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds. Natural-sounding portamento is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato octaves.
42 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Name
Trombone Sec 1
Trombone Sec 2
Trombone Sec 3
Trombone Sec 4
Trombone Sec 5
Trombone Sec 6
Brass1&Trumpet6
Brass2&Trumpet6
Horn 1 & 3
Octave Brass 1
Octave Brass 2
Octave Brass 3
Octave Brass 4
Octave Brass 5
Octave Brass 6
Octave Brass 7
Octave Brass 8
Trumpet 1
Trumpet 2
Contrabass 1
Contrabass 2
Contrabass 3
Contrabass 4
Contrabass 5
Contrabass 6
Pizzicato Bass 1
Pizzicato Bass 2
Acoustic Bass 1
Acoustic Bass 2
Bass & Cymbal
Brass Section 1
Brass Section 2
Brass Section 3
Brass Section 4
Brass Section 5
Brass Section 6
Power Brass
Soft Brass
Trumpet 3
Trumpet 4
Trumpet 5
Trumpet 6
Trumpet 7
Trumpet 8
Trumpet 9
Muted Trumpet 1
Muted Trumpet 2
Muted Trumpet 3
Muted Trumpet 4
Flugel Horn 1
Flugel Horn 2
Trombone 1
Trombone 2
Trombone 3
Muted Trombone 1
Muted Trombone 2
Horn 1
Horn 2
Horn 3
Horn 4
Horn 5
Horn 6
Muted Horn
Category No.
CONTRABASS
BRASS/
TRUMPET
24
25
26
27
19
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
17
18
09
10
11
12
13
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
01
02
03
04
43
44
45
46
47
38
39
40
41
42
48
49
50
51
52
33
34
35
36
37
28
29
30
31
32
Description
These sounds are used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds.
These are the sounds of contrabass being plucked by finger.
These acoustic bass sounds are ideal for jazz. This instrument is also known as “standup bass” and
“upright bass.”
This is a combination of acoustic bass and ride cymbal.
These are trumpet-based brass section sounds. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and other music.
This is a crisp and powerful brass section sound.
This is a soft and sustained brass section sound.
These are trombone brass section sounds. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a sweet, smooth sound for jazz ballads.
This is a combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 6.
This is a combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 6.
This is a combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3.
These are octave brass sounds with variations. They feature rich variations from strong, dynamic impact
Voices with quick attack, to soft, warm Voices for enriching the overall sound.
These are bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds.
These sounds recreate the distinctive tone that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet. The normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and metallic.
This is a brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound.
The slide trombone has distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” characteristics and features a wide range of expressive power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet.
A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone Voice.
These Voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound. The
Voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with virtually any instrument sound, woodwind or brass.
This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable of mimicking the sound of a human Voice.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 43
2
Category No.
BRASS/
TRUMPET
53
54
55
Voice Name
Tuba 1
Tuba 2
Euphonium
WOODWIND/
FLUTE
56
57
58
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Brass Bass 1
Brass Bass 2
Brass Bass 3
Flute 1
Flute 2
Flute 3
Flute 4
Flute 5
Piccolo
Recorder 1
Recorder 2
Ocarina
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
39
44
29
30
31
32
33
34
25
26
27
28
20
21
22
23
24
45
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
Whistle
Clarinet 1
Clarinet 2
Clarinet 3
Clarinet 4
Bass Clarinet
Oboe 1
Oboe 2
Oboe 3
English Horn
Bassoon 1
Bassoon 2
Bassoon 3
Alto Sax 1
Alto Sax 2
Tenor Sax 1
Tenor Sax 2
Tenor Sax 3
Soprano Sax
Baritone Sax
Sax Ensemble 1
Sax Ensemble 2
Sax Ensemble 3
Sax Ensemble 4
Sax Ensemble 5
Sax Ensemble 6
Woodwind Ens 1
Woodwind Ens 2
Woodwind Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 4
Clarinet&Flutes
Clarinet & Oboe
Flutes & Oboes
Woodwind&Glocken
S-Flute
S-Alto Sax
TUTTI
04
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
Strings & Winds
Strings&Brass 1
Strings&Brass 2
Strings&Brass 3
Strings & Horn
Trumpets & Winds
Horns & Winds
Orchestra Bass
Description
This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that supports brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in playing humorous phrases.
This instrument features a characteristically broad and deep — even noble — sound, and is frequently used as a solo instrument.
These are brass ensembles for playing in the lower octaves. They also have a timpani sound in unison.
This light and transparent instrument Voice sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is equally good for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies.
This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher octaves.
This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some medieval and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound.
This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the sound quality are changed by the strength of the breath.
This sound is a reproduction of a human whistling.
This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character — with rich sound in the low end and crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles including classical chamber music and swing jazz.
This instrument has a thick, deep sound and is played one octave lower than the normal clarinet.
An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal tone — yet it is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion.
Also known as “cor anglais,” this instrument is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited for the performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces.
This instrument belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used as a solo instrument.
Among the woodwind instruments, this instrument is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly prominent role. Its wide expressive power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz.
This instrument is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in soul and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces.
This instrument features a characteristic high, “stretching” sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet, emotional passages.
This is a soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music.
These are saxophone ensemble sounds with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical music and a sax section for big band.
These are woodwind ensemble sounds that change the instrument depending on the particular register played.
*1
*2
*1
*2
This is a clarinet and flute ensemble.
This is a clarinet and oboe ensemble.
This is a flute and oboe ensemble.
This is a combination of woodwind ensemble and glockenspiel.
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds.
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds. Natural-sounding glissando is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato octaves.
This is a strings and woodwind ensemble.
This is a strings and brass section ensemble.
This is a strings and horn ensemble.
This is a trumpet, brass section, and woodwind ensemble.
This is a horn and woodwind ensemble.
This is a tuba, contrabass, and timpani ensemble.
44 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Name
Bell Pad 4
Bell Pad 5
Bell Pad 6
Bell Pad 7
Bell Pad 8
Bell Pad 9
Space Pad 1
Space Pad 2
Space Pad 3
Space Pad 4
Space Pad 5
Space Pad 6
Space Pad 7
Bright Pad
Noisy Pad 1
Noisy Pad 2
Noisy Pad 3
Noisy Pad 4
Warm Pad
Dark Pad
Sweep Pad 1
Sweep Pad 2
Sweep Pad 3
Sweep Phase
Sweep Flanger 1
Sweep Flanger 2
Pop Vocals Mmh
Smooth Pad 1
Smooth Pad 2
Smooth Pad 3
Smooth Pad 4
Smooth Pad 5
Smooth Pad 6
Smooth Pad 7
Resonance Pad 1
Resonance Pad 2
Resonance Pad 3
Resonance Pad 4
Resonance Pad 5
Resonance Pad 6
Resonance Pad 7
Resonance Pad 8
Bell Pad 1
Bell Pad 2
Bell Pad 3
Brass & Sax 1
Brass & Sax 2
Brass & Sax 3
Brass & Winds
Orchestra Hit 1
Orchestra Hit 2
Choir 1
Choir 2
Choir 3
Choir 4
Choir 5
Choir 6
Choir 7
Choir 8
Choir 9
Vocal
Gospel Choir
Pop Vocals Bee
Pop Vocals Daa
Category No.
TUTTI
CHOIR
PAD
34
35
36
37
38
29
30
31
32
33
24
25
26
27
28
19
20
21
22
23
39
40
41
42
43
44
15
16
17
18
10
11
12
13
14
05
06
07
08
09
14
01
02
03
04
09
10
11
12
13
04
05
06
07
08
13
14
01
02
03
09
10
11
12
This is a brass section and sax ensemble.
Description
This is a brass section and woodwind ensemble.
These are popular, widely used sampled sounds in which the many instruments of the orchestra play together on one chord or note. They are used for dramatic hits and accents.
These are vocal chorus sounds. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs.
This is a solo human Voice singing “ahh.”
This is a vocal chorus sound singing “whoo.”
These Voices include “bee,” “daa,” and “mmh” sounds that are divided between male and female
Voices based on range.
These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help support the other
Voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds.
These Voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads, and feature sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held.
These continuous pad Voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of Voices here — including an initial bell sound, as well as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously.
This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound.
This pad features a bright unison sound.
This pad features a bright, buzzy sound.
This pad features a wide, spatial sound.
This pad features a calm, “floating” attack.
This pad features sounds that change over time.
This pad features sounds that are processed with a phaser and that change over time.
This pad features sounds that are processed with a flanger and that change over time.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 45
2
2
Category No.
SYNTH
05
06
07
08
09
01
02
03
04
10
11
Voice Name
Synth Lead 1
Synth Lead 2
Synth Lead 3
Synth Lead 4
Synth Lead 5
Synth Lead 6
Synth Lead 7
Fat Saw Lead 1
Fat Saw Lead 2
Fat Saw Lead 3
Filter Lead
44
45
46
47
48
39
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
30
31
32
33
34
54
55
56
57
49
50
51
52
53
25
26
27
28
29
20
21
22
23
24
15
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
58
59
Pop Lead 5
Pop Lead 6
Synth Cla 1
Synth Cla 2
Synth Cla 3
Synth Cla 4
Synth Cla 5
Synth Cla 6
Synth Cla 7
Synth Sax
Synth Trumpet
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Synth Brass 3
Synth Brass 4
Synth Brass 5
Synth Brass 6
Synth Brass 7
Synth Brass 8
Soft Lead 1
Soft Lead 2
Soft Lead 3
Soft Lead 4
Chorus Saw Lead
Vintage Lead 1
Vintage Lead 2
Vintage Lead 3
Vintage Lead 4
Dance Chords 1
Dance Chords 2
Dance Chords 3
Club Lead 1
Club Lead 2
Pop Lead 1
Pop Lead 2
Pop Lead 3
Pop Lead 4
Synth Brass 9
Synth Brass 10
Synth Brass 11
Fat Synth Brass
DetunedSawBrass1
DetunedSawBrass2
DetunedSawBrass3
Soft Synth Brass
PWM Brass Slow
PWM Brass Fast
Funky Analog
Description
These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth Voice that has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch.
These are fat and bright synth lead sounds.
This synth lead sound features an attack that simulates an analog synthesizer, with a strong touch response.
These synth lead sounds simulate an analog synthesizer with a soft tone.
This is a bright synth lead sound processed with chorus.
These strong synth lead sounds simulate a popular analog synthesizer.
These bright, octave unison synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.
These detuned synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.
These light and round synth sounds are appropriate for solos and leads.
These bright, round and fresh synth sounds are reminiscent of the clarinet.
This is a wind synth sound.
This is a bright analog synth sound with tension.
This is an abundant variety of synth brass Voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to unique, comical sounds.
This is a fat synth brass sound.
These are powerful, detuned synth brass sounds.
This is a soft synth brass sound.
This is a synth brass sound that features tonal changes that are controlled by aftertouch. (PWM = Pulse
Width Modulation)
This is a synth brass sound with fast tonal changes. (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation)
This is a synth brass sound that features a characteristic initial attack.
46 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Name
Theatre Organ 4
Theatre Organ 5
Theatre Organ 6
Theatre Organ 7
Theatre Organ 8
TheatreTp&Kinura
Theatre Tp 16&8
Harmonica 1
Harmonica 2
Harmonica 3
Reed Organ
Bandoneon 1
Bandoneon 2
Accordion 1
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Accordion 4
AccordionMuset.
Jazz Organ 1
Jazz Organ 2
Jazz Organ 3
Jazz Organ 4
Jazz Organ 5
Jazz Organ 6
Jazz Organ 7
Vintage Organ
Vox Bell
Pop Synth Bell
Synth Decay 1
Synth Decay 2
Synth Decay 3
Synth Decay 4
Synth Sequence
TranceSequence 1
TranceSequence 2
Percussive Seq 1
Percussive Seq 2
Pipe Organ 1
Pipe Organ 2
Pipe Organ 3
Pipe Organ 4
Pipe Organ 5
Theatre Organ 1
Theatre Organ 2
Theatre Organ 3
Synth Strs 1
Synth Strs 2
Synth Strs 3
Synth Strs 4
Synth Strs 5
Synth Strs 6
Synth Strs 7
Synth Strs 8
Synth Strs 9
Synth Strs 10
Light SynStrings
FatSynStrings
Oct SynStrings 1
Oct SynStrings 2
Synth Bell 1
Synth Bell 2
Synth Bell 3
Synth Bell 4
Synth Bell 5
Category No.
SYNTH
ORGAN
24
25
26
27
28
19
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
17
18
09
10
11
12
13
29
30
31
32
33
34
04
05
06
07
08
88
89
01
02
03
83
84
85
86
87
79
80
81
82
74
75
76
77
78
69
70
71
72
73
64
65
66
67
68
60
61
62
63
These are spacious synth strings sounds.
Description
This is a useful synth strings sound.
This is a fat synth strings sound.
These are synth strings played in octaves.
These are synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds.
This is a combination of Voice Pad and Synth Bell.
This is a bright synth bell sound.
These are unique decaying synth sounds.
This synth sound is suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.
These synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios used in dance music.
These percussive synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.
The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich, majestic sound.
The Voices here range from soft to powerful.
This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie theaters, skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums.
This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads and solos.
This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound.
This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack.
A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including French chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music.
This is a musette tone accordion with a bright and unique tuning.
These electric organ sounds — great for jazz and R&B — are designed to be used with the rich rotary speaker effect.
This is a vintage organ sound.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 47
2
2
Voice Name
DX E.Piano&Pad 2
Galaxy E.Piano
Stage E.Piano 1
Stage E.Piano 2
Stage E.Piano 3
Stage E.Piano 4
Stage E.Piano 5
Stage E.Piano 6
Stack E.Piano 1
Stack E.Piano 2
Clavi 1
Clavi 2
Clavi 3
Nylon Guitar 1
Nylon Guitar 2
Nylon Guitar 3
S-Nylon Guitar 1
Organ Bass 3
Organ Bass 4
Piano 1
Piano 2
Piano 3
Honkytonk Piano
Octave Piano 1
Octave Piano 2
Octave Piano 3
Harpsichord 1
Harpsichord 2
Harpsichord 3
Clavichord
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
DX E.Piano 3
DX E.Piano 4
DX E.Piano 5
DX E.Piano&Pad 1
Vin Organ Slow 1
Vin Organ Slow 2
VintageOrganFast
Pop Organ 1
Pop Organ 2
Pop Organ 3
Pop Organ 4
Pop Organ 5
Pop Organ 6
Rock Organ 1
Rock Organ 2
Rock Organ 3
RockOrgan Slow 1
RockOrgan Slow 2
RockOrgan Slow 3
RockOrgan Slow 4
Rock Organ Fast
Organ Bass 1
Organ Bass 2
*2
Category No.
ORGAN
PIANO
GUITAR
13
14
15
16
17
08
09
10
11
12
03
04
05
06
07
54
55
01
02
49
50
51
52
53
44
45
46
47
48
39
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
28
29
30
01
02
03
04
23
24
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
22
05
06
07
S-Nylon Guitar 2
Flamenco Guitar
S-FlamencoGuitar
Description
These vintage organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.
This vintage organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.
These are multi-purpose organ sounds.
These are hard, overdriven, distorted organ sounds, ideal for rock.
These rock organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.
This rock organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.
These pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds are for lower register parts.
These are multi-purpose piano sounds.
This purposely out-of-tune piano sound is used in ragtime, older jazz and blues, and country rock music.
These are piano sounds played in octaves, including Voices that are an octave lower or two octaves higher.
This is the definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released.
This is a soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with a unique sound when the keys are released.
These electric piano sounds are from the popular DX7 synthesizer.
These sounds combine the popular DX7 synthesizer with pads.
This is a bright sound with a strong touch response.
These electric piano Voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright yet warm feel. They also have tremolo effects.
These bright electric pianos are characterized by their sharp attack sound.
These are funky sounds of a popular 1960’s era keyboard.
These sounds are of an acoustic guitar with nylon strings.
*2
*2
This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
This sound is the same as S-Nylon Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers touching strings.
This guitar sound is suitable for flamenco music.
This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
48 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Category No.
GUITAR 08
09
10
Voice Name
Steel Guitar 1
Steel Guitar 2
S-Steel Guitar 1 *2
11
32
33
34
35
36
27
28
29
30
31
37
38
39
22
23
24
25
26
17
18
19
20
21
12
13
14
15
16
40
S-Steel Guitar 2
12Str Guitar
Jazz Guitar 1
Jazz Guitar 2
Jazz Guitar Oct
S-Jazz Guitar
E.Guitar 1
E.Guitar 2
E.Guitar 3
Clean Guitar 1
Clean Guitar 2
Clean Guitar 3
Clean Guitar 4
E.Guitar Amp 1
E.Guitar Amp 2
E.Guitar Amp 3
Muted Guitar 1
Muted Guitar 2
Muted Guitar 3
S-Clean Guitar 1
S-Clean Guitar 2
Distortion Gtr 1
Distortion Gtr 2
Distortion Gtr 3
Distortion Gtr 4
Distortion Gtr 5
Distortion Gtr 6
Distortion Gtr 7
S-Dist Solid 1
S-Dist Solid 2 *2
Description
These sounds are acoustic guitar with steel strings.
*2
This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
This sound is the same as S-Steel Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers touching strings.
This is a 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.
These soft electric guitars are good for jazz solo passages.
*2
*2
*2
*2
This electric guitar is mixed with a Voice one octave higher, and is good for jazz solo passages.
This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric guitar.
These electric guitar sounds are suitable for accompaniment and arpeggios.
These electric guitar sounds feature amp simulations.
These are muted guitar sounds.
These are Super Articulation Voices. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced.
These are distorted guitar sounds.
This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
This sound is suitable for country and dixieland jazz.
This instrument is used commonly in Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound.
These are Hawaiian guitar sounds. They are effective when used with the glide function.
PERCUSSION
46
47
01
02
03
04
41
42
43
44
45
10
11
12
13
14
05
06
07
08
09
Banjo
Mandolin
Pedal Steel Gtr1
Pedal Steel Gtr2
Harp 1
Harp 2
Harp 3
Vibraphone 1
Vibraphone 2
Marimba 1
Marimba 2
Xylophone
Glockenspiel 1
Glockenspiel 2
Celesta 1
Celesta 2
Music Box 1
Music Box 2
Chime 1
Chime 2
Chime 3
The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and it is often played glissando for dramatic effect.
This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are connected by rod to a motor — which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in some jazz music.
This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates. However, the wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich lower register, giving it a wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument.
This instrument features dry and tight sounds.
These are sounds of a small glockenspiel, and feature a soft, shining sound.
The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to the glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound.
These are music box sounds.
These are chime sounds.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 49
2
Category No.
TIMPANI 01
02
Voice Name
Timpani 1
Timpani 2
ELECTRIC
BASS
SYNTH BASS
WORLD
11
12
13
14
15
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
01
16
17
18
19
20
02
12
13
14
15
16
07
08
09
10
11
02
03
04
05
06
03
04
01
03
Picked Bass 5
Fretless Bass 1
Fretless Bass 2
Fretless Bass 3
Fretless Bass 4
Funk Bass 1
Funk Bass 2
Funk Bass 3
Funk Bass 4
Funk Bass 5
Funk Bass 6
Funk Bass 7
Dance Bass 1
Dance Bass 2
Dance Bass 3
Dance Bass 4
Dance Bass 5
Dance Bass 6
Dance Bass 7
Dance Bass 8
Timpani Roll 1
Timpani Roll 2
Fingered Bass 1
Fingered Bass 2
Fingered Bass 3
Fingered Bass 4
Fingered Bass 5
Fingered Bass 6
Fingered Bass 7
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Slap Bass 3
Slap Bass 4
Slap Bass 5
Picked Bass 1
Picked Bass 2
Picked Bass 3
Picked Bass 4
Dance Bass 9
Dance Bass 10
Smooth Bass 1
Smooth Bass 2
Smooth Bass 3
Smooth Bass 4
Fat Bass 1
Fat Bass 2
Pan Flute 1
Pan Flute 2
Bagpipe
04
05
06
07
Dulcimer
Shakuhachi
Yokobue
Shamisen
08
09
10
11
12
13
Koto
Taishokoto
Er Hu 1
Er Hu 2
Er Hu 3
Ban Hu
Description
This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a definite pitch. It adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other instruments and plays a very important role in orchestral music.
These are timpani sounds played with a drum roll technique.
These are electric bass sounds played by finger.
These are percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass Voices feature variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played.
These electric bass Voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have variations in the
‘thickness’ of the sounds.
These are smooth fretless bass sounds. These fretless bass Voices have a unique sound, and are best used with subtle, sliding pitch changes.
These are synth bass sounds that feature a characteristic initial attack.
These synth bass sounds are suitable for dance music.
These are contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds.
These are fat synth bass sounds.
The pan flute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various countries, and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one line. It is a beautiful instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the Greek mythological god Pan.
This is a traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can be melancholy as well as dramatic and inspiring.
This is a characteristically clear and beautiful Voice.
This is a traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo.
This is a traditional Japanese flute.
This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with animal skin.
The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong Oriental flavor.
This is a Japanese koto sound.
This is a Japanese Taisho koto sound.
Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of producing sad, mysterious, or joyful melodies.
This traditional Chinese instrument features a clear, full sound, and is used as a solo instrument.
50 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Category
WORLD
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Voice Name
Ma Tou Qin
Di Zi
Suo Na
Hu Lu Si
Sheng
Gu Zheng 1
Gu Zheng 2
Yang Qin
Pi Pa
Liu Qin
San Xian
Surnay
Oud
Sitar
Steel Drum
Kalimba
S-Irish Pipe *1
*2
Description
This two-stringed bowed instrument has been passed down through generations by Mongolian nomads.
It is also known as the “horse-headed violin,” and features a strong yet sometimes delicate tone.
This is a Chinese flute. It features a unique sound produced by the vibration of a thinly stretched membrane.
This double-reed instrument is similar to an oboe, and features a joyful sound.
This Chinese folk instrument is a reed instrument with three bamboo pipes that pass through a gourd.
The center pipe is played, while the two outer pipes are typically drone pipes. It features a soft and graceful sound.
The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and apparently inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ.
This instrument is also called the Chinese koto. It has a long history during which it grew from 13 strings to the currently popular 21-string version. There are also 23-string and 25-string versions. It features a bright sound that is suitable for beautiful and lyrical melodies.
This percussive stringed instrument is a member of the zither family. Sound is produced by striking the strings with beaters. It is a relatively new Chinese instrument with origins influenced by the West.
This Chinese lute has a pear-shaped body, and it is used often for solo parts as well as accompaniment and ensembles.
This instrument is smaller than the Pi Pa, and is also called a “willow lute” because its shape resembles a leaf of a willow tree. It features a beautiful, crystal clear treble sound.
This traditional three-stringed Chinese instrument features snake skin stretched over both sides of a resonator. It is played with fingerpicks worn on the fingers to pluck the strings.
This vertical reed flute features a high-pitched tone.
This traditional stringed instrument is from Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and nearby regions.
This Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument has different resonances in the lower and mid/high ranges.
This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from 55-gallon oil drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th century. It has a bright and joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source.
African instrument.
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology to reproduce the characteristics of the Irish pipe.
Colorful expression is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and using Pitch Bend and grace notes.
*1 The Voices using AEM technology can be used for the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice sections, but they cannot be used for the Upper Keyboard Voice and
Lower Keyboard Voice sections.
*2 The Slide function (in the Voice Condition Display) is not applied to the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with the prefix “S-”).
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 51
3
Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections.
Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.
Controls and Effects
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Volume
Reverb (send level)
Pan
Feet
Brilliance
Initial Touch
After Touch
Touch Vibrato
Vibrato
Delay
Depth
Speed
Effect
Type
Parameters
Value
Transpose
Tune
Slide
Slide Time
Auto Articulation
Priority
Rotary Speaker
Reverb (Depth)
Sustain
Reference page for changing the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Lead Voice 1, 2
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54
page 55 page 55 page 55 page 55
page 56 page 56 page 56 page 56
page 58 page 58 page 58 page 58 page 58
page 59 page 59 page 59 page 59
–
–
–
–
**
–
–
–
–
–*
–*
–*
–
–
–
–
–
* Although Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard, they will be applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on.
** Priority is applicable only for Lead Voice 2.
52 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
1
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
To call up the Voice Condition display:
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice
Condition display appears.
Voice Condition Display
Currently selected page
Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) consists of five display pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages.
Setting and adjusting the parameters
Press the [A] – [D] buttons at the right of the display corresponding to the items or parameters you want to change, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired setting.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 53
3
Voice Condition [Page 1]
3
1
2
3
4
Reference Page
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including volume and reverb send level.
1 Volume
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 34 for more information.
2 Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.
When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the
setting here will have no effect. See page 61 for details.
3 Panning
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available.
Range: L3 – C – R3
4 Feet
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting.
54 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Condition [Page 2]
Press the Page buttons to select Page 2.
1
2
3
4
When the Pedal Voice is selected
When the Pedal Voice is selected, the Initial
Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato values are displayed in parentheses. Although you cannot use these functions with the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard, you can use them with the Pedal Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on
1 Brilliance
For adjusting the tonal quality of the Voice, making it brighter or warmer. Set the desired brilliance for each Voice over a range of “-3” (warmest) to “+3” (brightest).
2 Initial Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ
Voices.
3 After Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
NOTE
After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ Voices.
4 Touch Vibrato
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 55
Voice Condition [Page 3]
Press the Page buttons to select Page 3.
3
56 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
1
Vibrato
The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
1 Preset/User
Toggles between PRESET and USER.
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, the Delay, Depth and Speed parameters cannot be edited.
Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself.
Delay
Vibrato Control
Speed
1
2
3
4
2 Delay
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset.
Range: 0 – 14
3 Depth
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
4 Speed
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14
Voice Condition [Page 4]
Press the Page buttons to select Page 4.
Effect Category
1
2
3
4
Effect
You can select the effects applied to each Voice section.
1 Effect Category
You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section.
PRESET
REVERB
DELAY
ER/KARAOKE
CHORUS
FLANGER
PHASER
The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound is automatically selected.
Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms.
Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound.
The ER effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb sound, while Karaoke recreates the deep echo effect used in Karaoke sing-along applications.
Creates a warm effect as if several instances of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated.
This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound.
Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect.
TREMOLO/AUTO
PAN
This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right.
ROTARY SPEAKER
This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with the Left
Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). Keep in mind that the
Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by selecting it. To use the Rotary
Speaker effect, see “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.
DISTORTION
DISTORTION+
AMP SIMULATOR
This effect adds distortion to the sound.
A combination of Distortion, Delay and Compressor effects.
WAH
DYNAMIC
EQ/ENHANCER
A simulation of a guitar amp or microphone amp.
This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wah-wah” sound.
This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound.
EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality.
Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence.
PITCH CHANGE Changes the pitch of the input signal.
MISCELLANEOUS This category contains a wide range of special effects.
THRU Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 57
3
3
Reference Page
2 Effect Type
Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category.
Effect Parameters
You can set the parameters of effect type in 3 and 4 below. Generally, the effect parameters settings are optimally balanced for the selected effect type, so there is no need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the setting.
If you want to change the setting, select the parameter in 3, then change the value in
4. For details on each parameter type, page 64.
If you want to use the Rotary Speaker effect, set the Speed and Mode settings in the
Rotary Speaker display. See “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.
3 Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
4 Value setting
Voice Condition [Page 5]
Press the Page buttons to select Page 5.
1
2
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
1 Transpose
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.
Range: -6 – +6
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
2 Tune
Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer, richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another.
Range: -64 – +63
58 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice)
Press the Page buttons to select Page 6.
1
2
3
4
In this Page, you can set whether or not the Slide function/Auto Articulation function is applied to the Lead Voice, and how the monophonic Lead Voice 2 responds to your polyphonic playing (with Last or Top mode).
1 Slide On/Off
Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice.
Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect.
NOTE
The parameters here are not available when a Super
Articulation Voice is selected.
2 Slide Time
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the slower the speed.
Range: 0 – 14
3 Auto Articulation
Determines the on/off status of the Auto Articulation effect. The settings here, available only for Super Articulation Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding acoustic instrument, making your keyboard performance more realistic. Setting this to ON will apply various effects such as pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard performance.
NOTE
For information about what effect is produced by setting
Auto Articulation to ON, see
listed on these pages, Auto
Articulation is not available for some Voices.
4 Priority (only for Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
NOTE
Priority will not function when
Solo function is on.
• LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously.
• TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously.
Reference Page
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 59
Rotary Speaker
1
Select “Rotary Speaker” as the effect category.
Select “Rotary Speaker” here
3
60 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Set the Speed Control to on, then adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Speed Control, Speed and Mode settings are specified in the Rotary Speaker display. The Rotary Speaker display can be called up from Page 3 of the Utility display. Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display, then select
Page 3 by using the Page buttons. The settings in this display are common to all
Voice sections.
Rotary Speaker Display
1
2
3
1 Speed Control
Determines the on/off setting of the Rotary Speaker mode. When this is set to on, rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes fast, and the speed can be set in “ 2
Speed.” When set to off, the rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes slow or stops; a slow chorus effect is applied or the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops completely). Slow or Stop can be set in “ 3 Mode.”
2 Speed
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Press the [B] button to select the “Speed,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
3 Mode
Determines the slow/stop mode when the “Speed Control” is set to off. If Slow is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops completely).
Pressing the [C] button alternates between slow and stop.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel (in UTILITY) or conveniently from the Left
Footswitch.
3
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel (Speed Control parameter in UTILITY, Page 3), but also by using the Left Footswitch, if the
Footswitch has been properly assigned.
See “
4 Rotary Speaker” on page 180 for details.
2
Selecting from the panel
The Reverb and Sustain displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel.
Reverb
Reverb adds an ambient echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for the entire system.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages, press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears.
The Reverb display consists of two pages.
[Page 1] Reverb Display
1
2
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 61
3
3
NOTE
Depending on the reverb depth value (set in the
Reverb display), two adjacent REVERB button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position.
1 Depth
Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB buttons let you make coarse adjustment over a five-step range to the reverb depth, while this parameter gives you fine control. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the
settings in Voice Condition display, Page 1 (page 54) have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
The amount of reverb applied to each Voice
Reference Page
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 74)
2 Type
Selects the Reverb Type for the Voice sections. Several types can be selected: Room,
Hall, Stage, and so on. After changing the reverb type, the Time parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.
Reference Page
3 Time
Determines the reverb length for the Voice sections.
Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
[Page 2] Reverb Display
1
2
Reference Page
1 Type
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion.
2 Time
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
62 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
The Sustain effect is not applied to the Lead Voices.
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain.
The SUSTAIN display appears.
Sustain On/Off
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not affect the corresponding keyboard. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off before you start to play.
Sustain Length
Sustain Display [Page 1] Sustain Display [Page 2]
The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. Use the Page buttons and appropriate [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Voice section, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 12
NOTE
The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain off automatically resets the sustain length to the default setting.
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 63
3
3
Effect List
EFFECT TYPE Description
REVERB
HALL 1
HALL 2
HALL 3
HALL M
HALL L
XG HALL 1
XG HALL 2
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
ROOM 4
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
XG ROOM 1
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.
XG ROOM 2
XG ROOM 3
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
XG STAGE 1
XG STAGE 2
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a stage. Suitable for solo instruments.
PLATE 1
PLATE 2
XG PLATE
GM PLATE
WHITE ROOM
ATMO HALL
Reverb simulating the effect of a vibrating plate reverb.
A short reverb creating a warm ambience.
A long reverb creating a wide spatial effect.
ACOSTIC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Standard setting.
DRUMS ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. For drum sounds.
PERC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. For percussion sounds.
TUNNEL
CANYON
Reverb simulating a cylindrical space expanding to left and right.
A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.
A reverb with a unique resonance.
BASEMENT
DELAY
DELAY LCR
XG DLY LCR
Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and
C (center).
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY1
CROSS DELAY2
TEMPO DELAY1
TEMPO DELAY2
Produces two delayed sounds: L and R.
Produces two independent delayed sounds: L and R. Also capable of producing vintage delay effects.
The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed.
Tempo-synchronized delay.
EFFECT TYPE Description
TEMPO ECHO Tempo-synchronized echo.
TEMPO CROSS1 Tempo-synchronized cross delay.
TEMPO CROSS2
TEMPO CROSS3
TEMPO CROSS4
ER/KARAOKE
ER 1 Isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb.
ER 2
GATE REVERB1
GATE REVERB2
REVERS GATE
Creates a unique, powerful effect by cutting short the reverberation of a deep reverb.
Simulates gated reverb played back in reverse.
Echo for karaoke. Delay effect with feedback.
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS
CHORUS 1 Creates an effect of warmth and depth by periodically changing the pitch.
CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3
XG CHORUS 4
GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3
GM CHORUS 4
FB CHORUS
CHORUS FAST
CHORUS LITE
AMB CHORUS
CELESTE 1
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
CELESTE 4
AMB CELESTE
SYMPHONIC
XG SYMPHONIC
AMB SYMPHO
Chorus with early reflection sound.
A deeper chorus that adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound with a 3phase LFO.
Celeste effect with early reflection sound.
A chorus that adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.
Symphonic effect with early reflection sound.
Chorus without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.
ENS DETUNE 1
ENS DETUNE 2
FLANGER
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
Creates a modulating effect or a sound similar to that of a jet airplane.
64 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
EFFECT TYPE Description
V_FLANGER Simulates an analog flanger. Irregular LFO waveforms can also be selected.
Tempo-synchronized flanger.
TEMP FLANGER
DYNA FLANGER Enables the delay time of the flanger to respond dynamically to the input level.
VIN FLANGER1 Simulates an analog flanger, with a deep vintage sound.
VIN FLANGER2
AMB FLANGER Flanger with early reflection sound.
PHASER
PHASER 1
PHASER 2
PHASER 3
Periodically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMP PHASER1
TEMP PHASER2
DYNA PHASER
Periodically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. For electric piano.
Tempo-synchronized phaser.
VIN PHASER 1
VIN PHASER 2
VIN PHSR ST1
VIN PHSR ST2
VIN PHSR ST3
Enables the phaser modulation frequency to respond dynamically to the input level.
Simulates an analog phaser, with a deep vintage sound.
VIN PHSR ST4
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
TREMOLO 1 Periodically changes the volume.
TREMOLO 2
XG TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO 1
GT TREMOLO 2
ORG TREMOLO
VIBE VIBRATE
T_TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
XG AUTO PAN1
XG AUTO PAN2
EP AUTO PAN
T_AUTO PAN 1
T_AUTO PAN 2
ROTARY SPEAKER
Tempo-synchronized auto pan.
Simulates a rotary speaker.
XG ROTARY SP
ROTARY SP 1
ROTARY SP 2
Adds an vibrato effect, much like that of a vibraphone.
Tempo-synchronized tremolo.
Periodically moves the sound image both left and right, and front and back.
ROTARY SP 3
ROTARY SP 4
ROTARY SP 5
2WAY ROT SP Simulates a rotary speaker horn and rotor by dividing them into H (high) and L (low) bands.
EFFECT TYPE Description
DUAL ROTSP 1
DUAL ROTSP 2
DUAL ROT BRT
DUAL ROT WRM
DIST+ROT SP
ODRV+ROT SP
More complex and textured simulation of the independent rotation of the rotary speaker horn and rotor. (Bright / Warm)
AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series.
DIST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
ODRV+2ROT SP Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
DISTORTION
DIST HARD 1
DIST HARD 2
Distortion is an effect that adds “dirty” and “edgy” noise/distortion to the sound.
(Hard / Soft)
DIST SOFT 1
DIST SOFT 2
Stereo distortion. (Hard / Soft) ST DIST HARD
ST DIST SOFT
OVERDRIVE
ST OVERDRIVE
XG DIST
Adds mild distortion to the sound.
Stereo overdrive.
Adds some “edgy” distortion to the sound.
Stereo distortion.
XG ST DIST
V_DIST HARD
V_DIST SOFT
Simulates the sound of a vintage tube, fuzz effect, etc.
COMP+DIST
XG CMP+DIST
V_DIST WARM
V_DIST CLS H
V_DIST CLS S
V_DIST METAL
V_DIST CRUNC
V_DIST BLUES
V_DIST EDGY
Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series.
Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series.
Since a Compressor is included in the first stage, steady distortion can be produced regardless of changes in input level.
Simulates the sound of a vintage tube, fuzz effect, etc. (Warm / Classic, Hard /
Classic, Soft / Metal / Crunch / Blues /
Edge / Solid / Clean / Twin / Rockabilly /
Jazz Clean / Fusion)
V_DIST SOLID
V_DIST CLN 1
V_DIST CLN 2
V_DIST TWIN
V_DIST ROCA
V_DST JZ CLN
V_DST FUSION
DISTORTION+
DIST+DELAY
ODRV+DELAY
XG DIST+DLY
XG ODRV+DLY
CMP+DIST+DLY
Distortion and Delay connected in series.
Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
Distortion and Delay connected in series.
Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
Compressor, Distortion and Delay connected in series.
CMP+ODRV+DLY Compressor, Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 65
3
3
EFFECT TYPE Description
XG CMP+DT+DL Compressor, Distortion and Delay connected in series.
XG CMP+OD+DL Compressor, Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
V_DIST H+DLY V Distortion Hard and Delay connected in series.
V_DIST S+DLY V Distortion Soft and Delay connected in series.
DIST+T DLY
ODRV+T DLY
Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series.
Overdrive and Tempo Delay connected in series.
CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series.
CMP+OD+TDLY1 Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay
CMP+OD+TDLY2 connected in series.
CMP+OD+TDLY3
CMP+OD+TDLY4
CMP+OD+TDLY5
CMP+OD+TDLY6
VDST H+TDLY1
VDST H+TDLY2
VDST S+TDLY1
VDST S+TDLY2
AMP SIMULATOR
AMP SIM
XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1
ST AMP SIM 2
ST AMP SIM 3
ST AMP SIM 4
ST AMP SIM 5
XG ST AMP
V Distortion Hard and Tempo Delay connected in series.
V Distortion Soft and Tempo Delay connected in series.
Simulates a guitar amp.
Stereo amp simulator.
ST AMP SOLID
ST AMP CRUNC
ST AMP BLUES
ST AMP CLEAN
ST AMP HARP
SML ST DIST
SML ST OVRDR
SML ST VINTG
SML ST HEAVY
B CMB CLASC
Stereo effect that simulates a small guitar amp. Creates a distorted sound ideal for electric guitar.
B CMB TOPBST
B CMB CUSTOM British combo amp simulator with commonly used settings.
B CMB HEAVY
B LGND BLUES
B LGND HVY 1
British combo amp simulator with heavy sound settings.
British stack amp simulator with bluesy sound settings.
British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
1 settings.
B LGND HVY 2
British combo amp simulator with vintage sound settings.
British combo amp simulator with highend boost sound setting.
B LGND CLEAN
British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
2 settings.
British stack amp simulator with clean sound settings.
EFFECT TYPE Description
B LGND D CLN British stack amp simulator with crunch sound settings.
Simulates an American combo amp.
US CMB TWIN
USCMB RCH CL
USCMB THN CL
USCMB CRUNCH
JZ CMB BASIC
JZ CMB WARM
US HI GN DTY
US HI GN RIF
US HIGN BURN
US HIGN SOLO
B LD DIRTY
B LD DRIVE
B LD GAINER
B LD HARD
WAH
AUTO WAH
XG AUTO WAH
Simulates a jazz chorus combo amp.
Simulates the sound of an American highgain amp.
Simulates the sound of a British stack amp.
V_AUTO WAH
Creates a “wah wah” sound by periodically modulating the center frequency of a wah filter.
Simulates analog wah, for a strongly vintage sound. Periodically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter.
Enables you to change the wah effect with the strength of your playing.
TOUCH WAH 1
TOUCH WAH 2
TOUCH WAH 3
V_TOUCH WAH Simulates analog wah, for a strongly vintage sound. Enables you to change the wah effect with the strength of your playing.
Distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.
AT WAH+DIST
XG AT WH+DST
AT WH+DST HD
AT WH+DST HV
AT WH+DST LT
AT WAH+ODRV
XG AT WAH+OD
AT WH+OD HD
AT WH+OD HV
AT WH+OD LT
TC WAH+DIST
XG TC WH+DST
TC WH+DST HD
TC WH+DST HV
Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah.
Distortion can be applied to the output of
Touch Wah.
TC WH+DST LT
TC WAH+ODRV
XG TC WAH+OD
TC WAH+OD HD
TC WAH+OD HV
TC WAH+OD LT
Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of Touch Wah.
CLAVI TC WAH Clavinet Touch Wah.
EP TOUCH WAH EP Touch Wah.
WAH+DST+TDLY Wah, Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series.
WAH+OD+TDLY1 Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
WAH+OD+TDLY2 series.
66 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
EFFECT TYPE Description
WAH+DIST+DLY Wah, Distortion and Delay connected in series.
XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
XG WH+OD+DLY series.
TEMPO AT WAH
T_A.WH+DST
T_A.WH+DSTHD
Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah.
Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah.
T_A.WH+DSTHV
T_A.WH+DSTLT
T_A.WH+ODRV
T_A.WH+OD HD
T_A.WH+OD HV
T_A.WH+OD LT
DYNAMIC
M BAND COMP
Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.
COMPRESSOR
ST 3BAND EQ
XG 3BAND EQ
EQ DISCO
Multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the compression effect for three individual frequency bands.
Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded, reducing wide dynamic differences in sound volume. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound.
Compressor with medium setting.
Compressor with heavy setting.
Compressor for a melody part.
COMP MED
COMP HEAVY
COMP MELODY
COMP BASS Compressor for a bass part.
V_COMPRESSOR Simulates the vintage sound of an analog compressor.
NOISE GATE Removes unnecessary sound from the original sound. Primarily used to remove noise from the beginning and end of distinct sounds.
EQ/ENHANCER
ST 2BAND EQ A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and
HIGH equalization.
A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalization.
A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalization.
Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies of the audio signal, as is typical in most disco music.
EQ TELEPHONE Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies of the audio signal, for simulating the sound heard through a telephone receiver.
Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.
HM ENHANCER
XG HM ENHNCE
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE
XG PCH CHG 1
Changes the pitch of the input signal.
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width.
Impulse expander that adds a more metallic resonance.
RESONATOR Adds sonic resonance characteristic of wooden body instruments.
EFFECT TYPE Description
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
Attenuates the vocal part of a CD or other source.
Adds a vowel sound to the input signal.
Degrades the audio quality of the input signal.
Enables the filter cutoff frequency to respond dynamically to the input level.
DYNA RINGMOD Enables the ring modulator to respond dynamically to the input level.
RING MOD An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the high frequency of the input.
ISOLATOR
LOOP FX1
LOOP FX2
LO-FI DRUM 1
LO-FI DRUM 2
Controls the level of a specified frequency band of the input signal.
Degrades the audio quality of the input signal.
Degrades the audio quality of the input signal. Ideal for drum sounds.
LO-FI DRUM 3
LO-FI DRUM 4
DAMPER RESO Recreates the deep and broadly resonant sound that is produced when you use the damper pedal.
THRU
THRU Bypass without applying an effect.
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 67
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features hundreds different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to directly play drum and percussion sounds from the
Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.
1
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
Hundreds rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel.
To select and play a rhythm
1
Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the front panel.
For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display
(Rhythm Menu) will appear.
68 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm
Menu
Display
The Rhythm menu contains many Dance rhythms, and they will be shown in the display.
2
Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by rotating the
DATA CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.
Here, we’ve selected “12: Dancefloor.”
3
Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm.
Reference Page
Operating the rhythm from the panel (page 71)
Reference Page
4
To stop the rhythm, press this button again.
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm.
4
Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons.
The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no rhythm sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the
Rhythm Condition display (page 74).
Reference Page
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 74)
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 69
4
70 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely.
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of
Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the
ENDING [1] – [3] buttons.
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
Operating the rhythm from the panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm.
NOTE
When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When
Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. For details on Memory and the A.B.C.
4
INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played.
You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing.
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the Fill In pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 71
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired
MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) lights.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected
MAIN/FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
4
NOTE
You can record the currently selected section to
Registration Memory.
However, you cannot record the on/off status of the Auto
Fill In function.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The
Auto Fill In function is set in the Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again. Select Page 4 by using the Page buttons.
When Auto Fill is set to ON, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. Each press of the [A] button toggles between ON and OFF.
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks.
72 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the tempo
You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons.
Tempo
1 2
Bar/Beat
Lights up at the first beat in the bar during the playback of the Rhythm.
Bar (measure) Beat
1 TEMPO buttons
For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it.
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting.
2 Tempo Indicator (Bar/Beat Indicator)
Tempo indicator shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the Tempo indicator changes function to a Bar/
Beat indicator.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 73
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb
You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You can also have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON in
Display Page 4.
To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again.
4
[Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display
1
2
Reference Page
The buttons at the right side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial are used to control the rhythm volume and reverb.
NOTE
Depending on the volume value (set in the display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position.
1 Percussion Volume
Fine adjustment of the rhythm percussion volume. Same as the panel Rhythm
Volume buttons.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Adjusting the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment:
2 Percussion Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm percussion.
When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
74 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that have been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm
Pattern Program function (such as the ELS series). For details on selecting original
User rhythms, see next page.
This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons.
For example, to call up “25: Modern Shuffle,” select the R&B category.
1
Press User button [1] at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
4
The rhythm category appears at the upper right of the display.
2
Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons.
In this case, select Page “R&B.”
Currently selected Page
Metronome
When you want to use the
Metronome, select the
“METRONOME” Page.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 75
4
3
Select the “25: Modern Shuffle” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL dial.
This step assigns “25: Modern Shuffle” to the User button [1]. You can call up the
“25: Modern Shuffle” the next time you press the [1] button.
To call up a User rhythm
User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming functions, such as the ELS series, can be selected and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section.
To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to
Electone in advance.
For details on loading back the Registration, see “Recalling Recorded Registrations”
on page 154 and “Playing Back a Song” on page 155.
This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48.
1
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
2
Use the Page buttons to select Page “USER RHYTHM.”
3
Select the User rhythm number (User 1-48) by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.
76 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Rhythm List
MARCH
01 Simple March
02 Simple 6/8 March
03 Marching Band 1
04 Marching Band 2
05 Marching Band 3
06 German March
07 6/8 March
08 6/8 Kids
WALTZ
01 Waltz
02 Orchestral Waltz
03 Vienna Waltz 1
04 Vienna Waltz 2
05 Gentle Waltz
06 Classic Waltz
07 Jazz Waltz 1
*1
*1
*1
09 Orchestral March
10 Anime Fantasy
11 Galaxy Ship
12 SF March 1
13 SF March 2
14 Blockbuster
15 Broadway
16 Showtune
17 Wild West
*1
18 Pop Classics
19 French 50s
20 6/8 Organ March
21 Pub Piano
*1
*2
22 Baroque *2
23 Baroque Concerto *2
24 Strings Concerto
25 Choral Symphony
*2
*2
26 Brass Band Hymn *2
*1
08 Jazz Waltz 2
09 Jazz Waltz 3
10 JazzWaltz Medium
11 Jazz Waltz Fast
12 Mariachi
13 Snow Waltz
14 Vocal Waltz
15 Musette
16 Movie Soundtrack
17 Choir Soundtrack
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone.
18 Romantic Waltz
19 Classical Menuet
20 Green Fantasia
21 Guitar Serenade
SWING&JAZZ
01 Simple Big Band *1
02 Simple ComboJazz *1
03 Big Band 1
04 Big Band 2
*2
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
05 Big Band 3
06 Orch Big Band 1
07 Orch Big Band 2
08 Big Band Jazz
09 Big Band Fast
10 Big Band Bop
11 Movie Panther
12 Jungle Drum
13 Medium Jazz 1
14 Medium Jazz 2
15 Acoustic Jazz 1
16 Acoustic Jazz 2
17 Combo Swing
18 InstrumentalJazz
19 Manhattan Swing
20 Five-Four
21 Trad Piano Jazz
22 Jazz Ballad 1
23 Jazz Ballad 2
24 Moonlight
25 Winter Song
26 ChristmasShuffle
27 ChristmasBallad
28 Movie Swing
29 Afro Cuban 1
30 Afro Cuban 2
31 Foxtrot
32 Slowfox
33 Dixieland
34 Dixieland Jazz 1
35 Dixieland Jazz 2
36 Ragtime
37 Charleston
38 Orchestra Swing
39 Tap Dance Swing
*2
40 Organ Groove
POPS
01 Simple 8Beat Pop
02 Simple 3/4 Pop
03 SimpleShufflePop
04 8Beat Light 1
05 8Beat Light 2
06 16Beat
07 British 16Beat
08 Guitar Pop
09 Classic 16Beat
10 Fusion Shuffle
11 Folk Rock
12 Easy Pop
13 Chart Guitar Pop
14 Jazz Pop
15 British Pop
16 Pop Shuffle
17 Unplugged 1
18 Unplugged 2
19 Unplugged 3
20 JPN Pop Shuffle
21 JPN Idol Hits
22 JPN 70s Anime
23 JPN Soundtrack
24 Cute Pop
25 The 3rd Funk
26 Sunset DECA
27 US 70s TV Theme
28 Asian Pops
29 Scand Shuffle
30 60s Vintage Pop
31 60s Chart Swing
32 Bubblegum Pop
33 70s ChartCountry
34 Euro Pop Organ
35 Euro Fox
36 Euro Pop
*1
*1
*1
R&B
01 Simple Funk *1
02 Simple R&B Balad *1
03 Simple R&B Shfl
04 Soul
*1
05 16Beat Soul 1
06 16Beat Soul 2
*1
*1
*1
07 Frankly Soul
08 Live Soul Band
09 Soul Swing
10 6/8 Soul
11 Gospel Sisters
12 Hollywood Gospel
13 Gospel Party
14 New Gospel
15 Gospel Shuffle
16 Jazz Funk
17 Kool Funk
18 Let's Funk
19 Motor City
20 Detroit Pop
21 Blueberry Blues
22 Blues Shuffle 1
23 Blues Shuffle 2
24 Lovely Shuffle
25 Modern Shuffle
26 Cool R&B
27 Modern R&B
28 Soul R&B
*1
29 Worship Fast
LATIN
01 Simple BossaNova *1
02 Simple Samba *1
03 Simple Mambo
04 Simple Rumba
05 Bossa Nova 1
*1
*1
06 Bossa Nova 2
07 Pop Bossa 1
08 Pop Bossa 2
09 Bossa Brazil
10 Lounge Bossa
11 Big Band Samba
12 Light Samba
13 Jazz Samba
14 Mambo 1
15 Mambo 2
16 Rumba
17 Rumba Flamenco
18 Cha Cha Cha
19 Big Band Cha Cha
20 Pop Cha Cha 1
21 Pop Cha Cha 2
*1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 77
4
4
22 Salsa
23 Montuno
24 Calypso
25 Danzon
26 Bomba
27 Pop Latin
28 Beguine
29 Tango 1
30 Tango 2
31 Italian Tango
32 Guitar Rumba
WORLD MUSIC
01 Bolero
*1
02 Flamenco
03 Pop Flamenco
04 Pasodoble
05 Tarantella
06 Sirtaki
07 Hawaiian
08 Mexican Dance
09 Enka
10 Polka 1
11 Polka 2
12 Banda Polka
13 Zither Polka
14 Party Polka
15 Euro Polka
16 Irish Dance
17 Irish Hymn
18 Celtic Dance
19 Celtic Dance 3/4
20 Celtic Christmas
*1
*2
*2
*1
21 Sheriff Reggae 1
22 Sheriff Reggae 2
23 Caribbean
24 Zouk
25 Hoedown 1
26 Hoedown 2
*2
27 Bluegrass
28 ChinaPopBallad 1 *1
29 ChinaPopBallad 2
30 China Dance
31 China Trad 1
32 China Trad 2
33 Kung Fu
34 Ethereal Voices
*1
*1
*2
BALLAD
01 Simple 8BtBallad *1
02 SimpleRockBallad *1
03 Acoustic8BtBalad *1
04 8Beat Modern
05 16Beat Ballad 1
06 16Beat Ballad 2
07 6/8 Slow Rock
08 Schlager 6/8
09 Big Rock Ballad
10 90s Rock Ballad
11 Power Ballad
12 Easy Ballad
13 Love Song
14 Dramatic Ballad
15 Animation Ballad
16 70s Cool Ballad
17 70s Pop Duo
18 70s Glam Piano
19 Movie Ballad
*2
20 80s Movie Ballad
21 BigScreenClassic
22 Chart Ballad
23 Analog Ballad
24 Slow & Easy
25 Chillout
26 Easy Country
27 JPN Romantic Bld
*1
28 JPN Folk Pop Duo
29 JPN Dance Ballad *1
30 JPN R&B Ballad
31 JPN TVSoundtrack *1
32 Night Walk *1
*2
33 Organ Ballad 1
34 Organ Ballad 2
35 Guitar Ballad
36 Pop GuitarBallad
37 ElecPiano Ballad
38 Pop Piano Ballad
ROCK
01 Simple Rock
02 Simple Shfl Rock
03 Hard Rock 1
04 Hard Rock 2
05 Tears Rock 1
06 Tears Rock 2
07 British Rock
08 Power Rock
09 Stadium Rock
10 ContemporaryRock
11 Standard Rock
12 Acoustic Rock
13 Brit Rock Pop
14 Funk Pop Rock
*1
*1
*1
*1
15 ChartRockShuffle
16 Chart Piano Shfl
17 Beach Rock
18 Surf Rock
19 60s Rock
20 70s Rock
21 80s Power Rock
22 80s Pop Rock
23 80s Guitar Pop
24 00s Boy Band
25 Rock Shuffle
26 Rock & Roll
27 6/8 Rock
28 60s Rock & Roll
29 Jive
30 Swingin' Boogie
31 Southern Rock
32 New Country
33 Country Strum
34 Disco Fox Rock
35 JPN Pop Rock 1
36 JPN Pop Rock 2
37 JPN Band Rock 1
38 JPN Band Rock 2
39 JPN Light Rock 1
40 JPN Light Rock 2
41 JPN Rock Duo
42 JPN Idol Rock
43 JPN Kids Hero
44 Dragon Rock
45 Miracle Rock
46 Pretty Cute
47 Happy Pop
*1
*1
*1
DANCE
01 Simple Dance Pop *1
02 Simple Disco *1
03 Ibiza 1
04 Ibiza 2 *2
05 Trance Pop
06 Euro Trance 1
07 Euro Trance 2
08 6/8 Trance 1
09 6/8 Trance 2
*1
10 Club Dance 1
11 Club Dance 2
12 Dancefloor
13 Techno Party
14 80s Dance
15 Swing House
16 Dirty Pop
17 Mallorca Party
*1
*1
*1
*1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.
44 JPN Dance Pop 1
45 JPN Dance Pop 2
46 Cute Techno
47 Dance Police
METRONOME
01 Metronome 2/4
02 Metronome 3/4
03 Metronome 4/4
04 Metronome 6/8
05 Metronome 9/8
06 Metronome 12/8
07 Metronome 5/4
08 Metronome 7/4
09 Metronome 8/4
10 Wood Block 2/4
11 Wood Block 3/4
12 Wood Block 4/4
13 Wood Block 6/8
14 Wood Block 9/8
15 Wood Block 12/8
16 Wood Block 5/4
17 Wood Block 7/4
18 Wood Block 8/4
18 Disco Fox
19 Disco Philly
20 Disco Teens 1
21 Disco Teens 2
22 Disco Chocolate
23 Saturday Night
24 90s Disco
25 70s Disco 1
26 70s Disco 2
27 Chart Pop
28 Ground Beat
29 Synth Pop
30 UK Pop
31 Turkish Eurobeat
32 Oriental Pop
33 Pop Beat
34 Garage 1
35 Garage 2
36 Electronica
37 Club Latin
38 Latin Disco
39 US Hip Hop
40 Hip Hop Pop
41 JPN Idol Pop 1
42 JPN Idol Pop 2
43 JPN Idol Pop 3
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
78 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
Accompaniment
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used.
To use the accompaniment parts, you’ll need to make appropriate settings in the
Rhythm Condition display.
1
Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
Rhythm Condition Display
2
Turn the desired parts on.
Use the Page buttons to select Page 2 or Page 3, then make settings for each part.
Pressing one of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired accompaniment parts successively alternates between ON and OFF.
Page 2 Page 3
Accompaniment parts
Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off status for all parts in Page 2 and Page 3 of the Rhythm Condition display. These parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are
Accompaniment parts.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 79
4
4
Chord 1/Chord 2
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
Pad
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as strings and organ.
Phrase 1/Phrase 2
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound.
Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
3
Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the
Lower Keyboard.
80 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment:
Make settings in Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display.
1
Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm button on the panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
Reference Page
Rhythm Condition display
2
Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
[Page 1]
Rhythm Condition Display
1
2
Determine the reverb and volume settings.
1 Accompaniment Volume
Determines the accompaniment volume.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
2 Accompaniment Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb Depth
(for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 81
4
5
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass
Chord (A.B.C.)
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic
Accompaniment patterns. You can select the desired mode in the A.B.C./M.O.C. display.
To set the A.B.C. function:
1
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
82 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Press the [A] button to select the “ABC MODE,” then select the desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
1 OFF
2 SINGLE FINGER
3 FINGERED CHORD
4 CUSTOM ABC
A.B.C. Mode
You can select modes in sequence: OFF SINGLE FINGER FINGERED
CHORD CUSTOM ABC by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set Lower/
Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on
1 Off
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
2 Single Finger
You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard.
Key of C
C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name).
Cm
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.
C7
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.
Cm7
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it.
NOTE
When the A.B.C. function mode is set to Single Finger or Fingered Chord, the bass part will not sound even if you play the pedals of the
Pedalboard.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance.
3 Fingered Chord
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord.
NOTE
When playing certain chords
(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure that the lowest note you play is the root of the chord.
Key of C
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
4
Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4
C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 Cadd9
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance.
4 Custom A.B.C.
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode.
It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 83
4
Memory
The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on, start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C. mode. With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you release your fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply play it and release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord and bass note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and take your time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep the accompaniment going.
When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note.
1
2
1 Lower Memory
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between ON and OFF.
2 Pedal Memory
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between ON and OFF.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard.
84 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
6
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment.
To set the M.O.C. function:
1
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
2
Turn the M.O.C. on.
Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between ON and OFF.
ON:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value.
Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 85
4
4
Rhythm Sequence
Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created on other
Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as the ELS series).
Although this Electone does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons on the panel for future recall, using the steps below.
When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next Unit data, these data types also can be loaded and played on this Electone.
While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be loaded.
1
Insert the USB flash drive that contains the desired rhythm sequence data into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button and select the desired Song which contains the Registration data you want to load back to
Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Reference Page
Reference Page
This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the
registration data in the Song (page 147).
3
Load back the desired registration.
If the desired registration is in Unit 1, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the MDR section to load back the Unit 1 registrations. If the desired registration is in a Unit other than 1, specify the Unit number then load back the Unit.
Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons.
86 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
Press the desired sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons to turn them on (the respective lamps light).
NOTE
Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons can be turned on at the same time.
5
Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back the rhythm sequence.
Only those sequences set to on can be played. Two or more rhythm sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 87
4
7
Keyboard Percussion
The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the
User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish.
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
NOTE
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on.
1
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
2
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to play
Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and press the
[2] button for the Pedalboard.
The Keyboard Percussion (KBP) display appears.
KBP Display
Pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the
Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the
Pedalboard.
3
Select the desired percussion kit.
You can select a kit from a total of 22 different kits.
Press the [B] button to select “KIT,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit.
88 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard
Reference Page
Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb
NOTE
The Keyboard Percussion volume and reverb settings made here are commonly applied to both Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.
1
2
1 Volume
Determines the Keyboard Percussion volume.
Press the [C] button to select “VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
2 Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select “REVERB,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 89
4
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments.
Preset 1 (UK)
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
Tom 2
Tom 1
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Closed
Cymbal
Hi-Hat Open
Tambourine
Finger Snap
Castanet
Triangle Mute
Wood Block L
Triangle Open
Wood Block H
Hand Clap
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Alarm Bell
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause
Wonderland Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
Laser Beam
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Closed
Cymbal
Hi-Hat Open
Tambourine
Finger Snap
Castanet
Triangle Mute
Wood Block L
Triangle Open
Wood Block H
Hand Clap
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Alarm Bell
Train
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
Tom 2
Tom 1
Snare
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
Sheep
Preset 2 (PK)
Thunder
Horse
Bass Drum
Footstep
Snare
Snare Roll
Footstep
Lion
Footstep
Oxen
Footstep
Door Slam
Big Clock
Footstep
Starship
Footstep
Train
Car Crash
Footstep
Puddle
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
EL Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Ride Cymbal 1
Orch Snare Drum
Crash Cymbal 1
Snare Drum Roll
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Triangle Mute
Tambourine
Triangle Open
Castanet
Cowbell 1
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 1 High
Wood Block Low
Conga Low
Wood Block High
Conga High
Bongo Low
Agogo Low
Bongo High
Agogo High
Cuica Low
Hand Claps
Cuica High
Shaker
Claves
Synth Tom 3
Concert BD
–
–
–
–
Synth Tom 2
Bass Drum Heavy
Synth Tom 1
Bass Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Roll
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Reverb 1
Snare Drum Light
Tom 3
Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom 2
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Hi-Hat Open
Preset 2 (PK)
Bass Drum Heavy
SD Brush Roll
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Reverb 1
Snare Drum Light
Tom 3
Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom 2
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Hi-Hat Open
Ride Cymbal 1
Synth Tom 3
Crash Cymbal 1
Synth Tom 2
Orchestra Cymbal
–
Synth Tom 1
–
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
90 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 1 (UK)
Standard Kit 1
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Kick
Preset 2 (PK)
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 1 (UK)
Standard Kit 2
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft 2
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot H
Kick Tight
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Hand Clap
Snare Tight H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Hand Clap
Snare Tight H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 91
4
Preset 1 (UK)
Hit Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Electro
Sticks
Kick Tight L
Snare Pitched
Kick Wet
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Ambient
Hand Clap
Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Hybrid Tom 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Light
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Ambient
Hand Clap
Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Hybrid Tom 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Light
Splash Cymbal
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Room Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare Snappy
Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snap
Tom Room 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Room 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Room 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Room 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Kick
Preset 2 (PK)
Side Stick
Snare Snappy
Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snap
Tom Room 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Room 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Room 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Room 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
92 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Preset 1 (UK)
Rock Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Noisy
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick 2
Kick Gate
Side Stick
Snare Rock
Hand Clap
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Rock 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Rock 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Rock 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Gate
Side Stick
Snare Rock
Hand Clap
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Rock 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Rock 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Rock 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electro Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Reverse Cymbal
Snare Roll
Hi Q 2
Snare Snap Elec
Sticks
Kick 3
Open Rim Shot
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick
Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick
Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 93
4
Preset 1 (UK)
Analog Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Reverse Cymbal
Snare Roll
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
Sticks
Kick 3
Open Rim Shot
Kick Anlg Short
Kick Analog
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Analog
Hand Clap
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hat Close Analog
Tom Analog 2
Hat Close Anlg 2
Tom Analog 3
Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas 2
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves 2
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Analog
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Analog
Hand Clap
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hat Close Analog
Tom Analog 2
Hat Close Anlg 2
Tom Analog 3
Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas 2
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves 2
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Dance Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Snare Analog 3
Vinyl Noise
Snare Analog 4
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Dance 2
Hi Q 2
Snare Techno
Snare Dance 1
Kick Techno Q
Rim Gate
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Clap
Dance Clap
Snare Dry
Tom Dance 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Dance 2
Hat Close Anlg 3
Tom Dance 3
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Crash Analog
Tom Dance 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Anlg
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Dance
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap Analog
Ride Analog
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Techno
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Clap
Dance Clap
Snare Dry
Tom Dance 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Dance 2
Hat Close Anlg 3
Tom Dance 3
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Crash Analog
Tom Dance 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Anlg
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
94 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Preset 1 (UK)
Jazz Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Jazz H
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Hand Clap
Snare Jazz M
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Hand Clap
Snare Jazz M
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Brush Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Snare Roll
Castanet
Brush Slap 2
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Brush Slap 3
Hand Clap
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Brush 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Brush 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Brush Slap 3
Hand Clap
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Brush 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Brush 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 95
4
Preset 1 (UK)
Symphony Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft 2
Open Rim Shot
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
Side Stick
Band Snare
Hand Clap
Band Snare 2
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Hand Cymbal
High Tom
Hand Cymbal S
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Hand Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Hand Cymbal 2 S
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Gran Cassa Mute
Side Stick
Band Snare
Hand Clap
Band Snare 2
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Hand Cymbal
High Tom
Hand Cymbal S
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Preset 1 (UK)
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Live! Studio Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Studio 2
Sticks
Kick Ambience H
Open Rim Shot
Kick Ambience L
Kick Studio
Side Stick
Snare Studio M
Hand Clap
Snare Studio L
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Studio
Side Stick
Snare Studio M
Hand Clap
Snare Studio L
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
96 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Preset 1 (UK)
House Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
W Kick
Disco Fx
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
Kick T9 4
Snare T8 Rim
Snare T8 5
Hand Clap
Snare Garg L
Snare Roll
Snare T9 3
Snare T8 1
Snare T9 5
Kick T9 1
Snare T9 Gate
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 5
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T9 1
Clap T9
Snare T9 2
Tom T9 1
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Tom T9 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Tom T9 3
Hi-Hat Open T9
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Crash Cymbal T9
Tom T9 6
Ride Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 4
RideCymbal Cup 2
Tambourine Hit
Splash Cymbal 2
Cowbell 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Cowbell T8
Ride Cymbal 3
–
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Analog Shaker
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Snare Break Roll
Noise Burst
Vox Bell
Snare R&B 1
Vox Alk
Udu High
Filter Kick
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Conga H Tip
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Open 2
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas Slur 2
Vox Drum L
Vox Drum H
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica H
Cuica L
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick T9 5
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T9 1
Clap T9
Snare T9 2
Tom T9 1
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Tom T9 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Tom T9 3
Hi-Hat Open T9
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Crash Cymbal T9
Tom T9 6
Ride Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 4
RideCymbal Cup 2
Tambourine Hit
Splash Cymbal 2
Preset 1 (UK)
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
–
–
–
Ghost
Maou
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SFX Kit 1
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
–
String Slap
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flute Key Click
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
–
String Slap
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flute Key Click
–
–
–
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 97
4
Preset 1 (UK)
SFX Kit 2
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Phone Call
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
–
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
–
–
–
–
Foot Steps
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Phone Call
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 1 (UK)
Noise Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
White Noise
–
–
–
–
–
–
Pink Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
PinkNoise Up LFO
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 2 (PK)
White Noise
Pink Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
PinkNoise Up LFO
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
98 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
MetalGuiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
Tambourine
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Tambourim Tip
Maracas
Shaker
Cabasa
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cowbell High 1
Cowbell High 2
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
–
Wind Chime
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 1 (UK)
Pop Latin Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
Timbale L
–
–
–
–
Paila L
Timbale H
–
–
–
–
Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip
Claves High
Claves Low
Hand Clap
–
Finger Snap
Castanet
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Paila H
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
Timbale L
–
–
–
–
Paila L
Timbale H
–
Doff Tak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Sagat 1
Tabel Dom
Sagat 3
Tabel Tak
Sagat 2
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 2
Rik Finger 1
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Katem Tak
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Rik Tak 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preset 1 (UK)
Arabic Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Duhulla Dom
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak
Cowbell
Duhulla Sak
Claves
Doff Dom
–
–
–
–
Nakarazan Dom
Cabasa
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Kick Soft
Side Stick
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap
Snare Drum
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Soft
Side Stick
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap
Snare Drum
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Duhulla Dom
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 99
4
Preset 1 (UK)
China Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 1
Luo High 1
Gong Batter
Jin Luo
Luo High 2
Luo Mid-Low
Luo
Jin Luo Low
Da Cha 1
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha Effect
Da Cha 2
Da Gu mp
Da Gu Rim
Da Gu f
Da Gu Hand
Da Gu Roll
Pai Gu 4
Pai Gu 4 High
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Xiaocha
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
Qing
Finger Bell
Luo Big
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Nanbangzi Roll
Nanbangzi
Bangu
–
Yunluo High G#
Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ban
Bangu Roll
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#
Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Preset 2 (PK)
Luo High 1
Gong Batter
Jin Luo
Luo High 2
Luo Mid-Low
Luo
Jin Luo Low
Da Cha 1
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha Effect
Xiaocha
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
Qing
Finger Bell
Luo Big
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Preset 1 (UK)
Whip
Rotating Tom 5
Tubular Bell L
Rotating Tom 4
Tubular Bell M
Rotating Tom 3
Tubular Bell H
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 1
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Anveil
Triangle Roll
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Orchestra Perc
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong L
Symphonic Gong 2
Timpani E
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Roll
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
Sus Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 5
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Concert Tom 4
Orch Cymbal 1
Concert Tom 3
Orch Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 1
Finger Cymbal
Gong
Ride Cymbal Tip
China Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Jingle Ring
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Snare Ensemble
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
Sus Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 5
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Concert Tom 4
Orch Cymbal 1
Concert Tom 3
Orch Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 1
Finger Cymbal
Gong
Ride Cymbal Tip
China Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
100 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User
40. The User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
NOTE
By default, the same data as the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit is stored to User Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.
1
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
The KBP display appears.
KBP Display
4
2
Select “User 1” here.
Press the [A] button to select “User 1.” If another name is shown, select “User 1” with the DATA CONTROL dial.
This step assigns “User 1” to the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. You can call up “User 1” the next time you press the [1] button.
3
Select the desired percussion kit.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the kit. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 101
4
102 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
Use the Page buttons to select the ASSIGN Page.
In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
1
2
3
4
1 Category
This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
2 Instrument Names
The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the [B] button.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
3 Assign
Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following explanation in step 7.)
4 Clear
This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the following
5
Select the desired percussion group.
Press the [A] button to select “CATEGORY,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the category.
6
Select the desired instruments.
Press the [B] button to select “INST.” (Instrument), then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired instrument.
7
To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal.
Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button [C] corresponding to
“ASS.”(Assign) and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User 1.
7-1.
While holding down
[C] button...
NOTE
Though 40 User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard
Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration
Memory. If you want to save the User Keyboard
Percussion setups with the
Registration Memory, save the data to the USB flash
Keyboard Percussion setups will be saved to each Unit.
7-2.
Press the key.
When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is displayed at the bottom of the display. The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1).
8
Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to “CLR.”(Clear) in the display and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)
NOTICE
The Keyboard Percussion on/off data and Menu is automatically saved to
Registration Memory when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off. A “
” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
1.
While holding down
[D] button...
4
2.
Press the key.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 103
4
104 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments in ASSIGN Page of the Keyboard Percussion display.
1
Press, then release the [D] “CLR.” (CLEAR) button in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to “CANCEL.”
2
Press the [C] “CLR.” (Clear) button to erase all data. When the [C] button is pressed, an “Assignments of User xx have been cleared” message momentarily appears on the display.
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion
1
Press the Keyboard Percussion button.
2
Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit.
Press the [A] button to select “MENU,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired User number.
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
EL Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam-Tam
HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Closed
SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
Kit Assign List
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime Down
Wind Chime Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Wood Block High
Wood Block Mid
Wood Block Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 105
4
4
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
106 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
TOM
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
Vibraslap Analog
PERCUSSION 2
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 107
4
4
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
108 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Mute
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!StudioKit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Studio M
Snare Studio L
Snare Studio 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Studio
Kick Ambience L
Kick Ambience H
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
SFX Kit 1
SFX
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell T8
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas Slur 2
PERCUSSION 2
Cuica H
Cuica L
Cabasa
Agogo H
Agogo L
Analog Shaker
Udu High
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Hit
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Clap T9
Hand Clap
Vox Drum H
Vox Drum L
Vox Alk
Vox Bell
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
House Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 4
Splash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
SNARE DRUM
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 5
Snare T9 Gate
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 5
Snare T8 Rim
Snare Garg L
Snare R&B 1
Snare Roll
Snare Break Roll
TOM
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Tom T9 6
BASS DRUM
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 5
W Kick
Filter Kick
NOISE
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Noise Burst
Disco Fx
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open 2
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Tip
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Timbale H
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Noise Kit
NOISE
White Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Pink Noise
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
PinkNoise Up LFO
Wonderland Kit
SE
Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
NATURE
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
DAILY
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Alarm Bell
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause
VEHICLE
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
ANIMAL
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H
Timbale L
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell High 1
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
PERCUSSION 1
Cymbal
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Tom 2
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
PERCUSSION 2
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 109
4
4
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
Cowbell High 2
Claves High
Claves Low
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
MetalGuiro Short
PERCUSSION 2
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
Tambourine
Tambourim Tip
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Castanet
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
PERCUSSION 3
Hand Clap
Finger Snap
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip
110 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
China Kit
DRUM
Da Gu f
Da Gu mp
Da Gu Rim
Da Gu Roll
Da Gu Hand
Pai Gu 1
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 4
GONG 1
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#
CYMBAL
Da Cha 1
Da Cha 2
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha
Xiaocha Effect
Gong Batter
Luo Big
Luo
Luo Mid-Low
Luo High 1
Luo High 2
Jin Luo
Jin Luo Low
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
OrchestraPerc
CYMBAL
China Cymbal
Finger Cymbal
Orch Cymbal 1
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Orch Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Tip
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
SNARE DRUM
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Snare Roll
TOM
Concert Tom 1
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 3
Concert Tom 4
Concert Tom 5
Rotating Tom 1
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 3
Rotating Tom 4
Rotating Tom 5
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc
GONG
Gong
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong 2
Symphonic Gong L
TIMPANI
Timpani E
Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Yunluo High G#
GONG 2
Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C
PERCUSSION
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Ban
Bangu
Bangu Roll
Nanbangzi
Nanbangzi Roll
Qing
Finger Bell
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Cowbell
Claves
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Tubular Bell H
Tubular Bell M
Tubular Bell L
Wind Chime
Jingle Ring
Tambourine
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet
PERCUSSION 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Roll
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Anveil
Whip
5
Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a professional player. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, conveniently allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing—simply by pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are conveniently located at the top right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.
Moreover, for even greater convenience, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive.
1
Storing Registrations
Newly created Registrations you’ve made can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive.
1
Create your original Registration by making all desired panel settings.
Reference Page
• Selecting a Rhythm
• Selecting a Voice
• Voice Controls and Effects
2
While holding down the [MEMORY] button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration.
NOTE
By default, Bank A is called up to the panel Registration buttons. Thus, your registration is stored to Bank
A. For details about Banks,
2-1.
While holding down the [MEMORY] button...
2-2.
Press the desired numbered button.
When the Registration is stored, the LED of the numbered button flashes momentarily.
NOTICE
When storing the
Registration to the numbered button, a “ ” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 111
To store Registrations 9 – 16
Although this Electone has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen
Registrations can be stored by turning on the [9-16] button to make the numbered buttons function as 9 – 16. To restore to the 1-8, turn off the [9-16] button. Then, in both cases, all you have to do is simply press the desired numbered button while holding down the [MEMORY] button as described in step 2.
5
Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
• LCD contrast
• MIDI Control settings (page 190)
• Wireless LAN settings
• LCD related settings (page 27)
The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Registration Shift (page 121)
• Keyboard Percussion Kit/Assign
112 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Selecting Registrations
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. (The selected button’s LED lights.)
To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the appropriate numbered button.
Example: Calling up Registration Number 11
1.
Turn on the [9-16] button...
2.
Press the appropriate button
To call up the Registrations stored to another Bank
If you’ve selected another Bank and stored Registrations to it, you will need to select the same Bank to recall the Registrations. Select the Bank in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the panel numbered button to recall the Registration. For details
on how to select the Bank, refer to page 116.
You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right
footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 121).
5
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 113
5
NOTE
The Disable function is available even after changing the Bank.
Using the [DISABLE] button:
Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns as well as the tempo also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times during your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [DISABLE] button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your
Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to.
When the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
The particular settings that do not change when the [DISABLE] button is on depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode” below.
Selecting Disable mode:
The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [DISABLE] button is on. There are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is disabled).
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The UTILITY display appears.
3
2
114 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
3
Press the [B] button to set DISABLE MODE to “NORMAL” or
“TEMPO.”
NORMAL
When the Disable Mode is set to Normal and the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration
Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
TEMPO
When the Disable Mode is set to Tempo and the [DISABLE] button is on, the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number.
5
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 115
5
3
Storing Registrations to Another Bank
Registration Memory and Banks
The ELB-02 series lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which consists of 1 – 16 Registration Memories. Although preset various Registrations are stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by default, you can replace them with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also to
Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function
(page 120) recalls the preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created
Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty status.
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Bank A
With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you can store your original
Registrations to Banks A and B. Bank C is available only after Registrations have been stored to Bank B. Likewise, other Banks (up to Bank E) will not be available until the Bank preceding it contains data.
To select the Bank:
1
Call up the VOICE Display, then select the Page 3.
The currently selected Registration bank will be shown.
116 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Select the desired Bank by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to the last Bank containing data. When Banks A and B contain Registration data, for example, you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The message shows whether the selected Bank contains data or not. When you select the Bank containing data, no message is shown, while a message “Registration is not recorded” is shown when you select an empty Bank.
To store the Registration:
3
Create your original Registration, then store it to any of the
Number buttons 1 – 16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on
4
Deleting Banks
Select the desired Bank to be deleted in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the
[D] button corresponding to “DELETE” in the display. A message “Are you sure you want to delete the Bank xx” appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press the [C] “DELETE” button if you want to delete the Bank, or [D] “CANCEL” button to cancel the operation.
Bank A can only be deleted if data is stored to another bank (other than A).
NOTE
When you try to store
Registrations after changing the Bank, a confirmation dialog appears. Confirm whether or not you want to set the current Bank as the destination. If you want to set the current Bank as the destination, press the [C]
“OK” button, or press the [D]
“CANCEL” button to cancel the operation.
5
Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to the previous Bank respectively. For example, deleting the Bank A will move the data of Bank B to Bank
A, Bank C to Bank B, Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 117
5
5
Saving the Registration Data to USB
Flash Drive
Reference Page
Reference Page
The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can be saved to a USB flash drive connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
For details about the save operation, see Chapter 6, Music Data Recorder (MDR).
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash drive.
Make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible
USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort,
etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button.
The MDR display appears.
3
Confirm the SONG Page is shown.
Confirm “SONG” is shown at the top right of the display. If another page is shown, select the “SONG” Page by simultaneously pressing both Page buttons.
4
Select the Song to which you want to save the Registration data.
Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display to call up the
Song/Folder list, in which you can find “new song” (blank Song) at the bottom of the list. Select “new song” by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial.
118 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Press the [D] “UNIT” button.
The UNIT EDIT display appears.
6
Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes and the Song name and the Unit number will be shown in the display. The Registration data stored to
Banks A – E is now saved as a Unit to the USB flash drive.
Song name
7
Press the [D] “EXIT” button.
The display returns to MDR display.
About Banks and Units
The Registration Memory data (16 x up to 5 Banks) stored to internal memory of the instrument will be handled as a “Unit.” If you want to create more than 80 (=16 x 5
Banks) Registrations, create another Unit to create more additional Registrations. The Unit can be edited in the MDR
Song
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory Bank A
Unit number
Reference Page
Reference Page
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 119
5
NOTE
6
Initializing Registration Memory
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory and restores the original factory-programmed Registration Memory presets. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to a USB flash drive.
If you want to delete a specific Bank, see “Deleting Banks” on page 117.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Page 1 of the UTILITY display.
If another page is shown, select Page 1 by using the Page buttons.
5
Reference Page
2
Press the [D] “INITIALIZE” button.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press [C] “INITIALIZE” button to actually initialize the data. When the operation is complete, the Electone will be restarted.
120 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
7
Registration Shift
The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations without needing to take your hands from the keyboards.
By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified
Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has four modes: Off, Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the VOICE Display.
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.
2
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
3
Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
The REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display appears.
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT)
Display
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 121
5
5
4
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display by successive pressing of the [A] button.
Select each in order (Off Shift Jump User).
1 OFF
2 SHIFT
3 JUMP
4 USER
1 Off
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations cannot be changed by using the Right Footswitch.
2 Shift
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function
‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of numbered buttons 1 – 16 light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the [9-16] button lights up in addition to the selected numbered button if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected.
You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.
NOTE
In the Shift mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up another Registration Bank.
Bank
Current Registration Next Registration
122 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3 Jump
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
Press the [B] button to select the Jump destination.
NOTE
In the Jump mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up another Registration Bank.
You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.
Bank
Current Registration Registration number of the destination
4 User
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the Registration Shift function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be set in Page 1 of the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.
5
To set the User Registration order:
Before proceeding, set the mode to 4 User.
1
Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.
For details about how to select Banks, refer to page 116.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 123
2
Call up Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.
[Page 2] REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) Display
5
Enter the Registration Number
NOTE
To select the Registration from another Bank, select desired Bank in the Page 3 of the VOICE display
the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, press the [FOOT
SWITCH] button.
3
Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section.
If you want to use 9 – 16 Registrations, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the desired numbered button.
4
Press the [A] “INS.” (Insert) button.
Highlighted cursor indicates the data entry position.
NOTE
No Bank indication will be shown as long as same
Registration Bank will be used.
5
The Bank indication and Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered.
Bank
124 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
6
Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the
Registration order. Up to 400 steps with 80 Registrations (16
Registrations x 5 Banks) can be memorized.
7
After settings, move the cursor to the top position with DATA
CONTROL dial, then press the Right Footswitch as you play the
Electone.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. If you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance, use DATA CONTROL dial to move the cursor back to the correct position.
NOTICE
The Registration Shift setting will be automatically saved to the
Registration data when you switch to another display.
While data is being saved, a “ ” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the
Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the save operation is in progress, or without switching to another display, otherwise the data will be lost.
Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] and [D] buttons or
DATA CONTROL dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using the [A] and [B] buttons.
Move the cursor position
Data Entry Position: Highlighted cursor indicates the current data entry position.
If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to the right, press the [D] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
NOTE
Registration data cannot be added or deleted when the cursor position is at the
“TOP” (found at the lower left of the screen) after inputting the number. Add or delete the data after moving the cursor by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise.
NOTE
Up to five Registration numbers can be displayed at once in the LCD; however, screen scrolling is enabled when four or more
Registration numbers are input. Turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counterclockwise to scroll back toward the beginning.
Insert: Use the [A] button.
This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the
Registration row.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the [A]
“INS.” button. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row.
After using [A] “INS.” button to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers.
Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and press the [A]
“INS.” button. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 400. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, “INS.” in the display will changed to “---” and the operation cannot be executed.
Delete: Use the [B] button.
To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press the [B] “DEL.” button.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 125
5
Shift End:
Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function.
Press the Page buttons to select Page 1.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
1
STOP
2 TOP
3 NEXT UNIT
5
1 Stop
Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
2 Top
After the last preset is reached, “Top” is called up, returning operation to the beginning. To select the first preset, press the Right Footswitch.
Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance)
NOTE
• When you play the Song using Next Unit function, always press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button to start the
Song with CUSTOM PLAY
to off since CUSTOM PLAY function will not activate the
Next Unit function.
• When you use the Next
Unit function during
Rhythm playback, Rhythm
Sequence and User
Rhythm cannot be loaded.
3 Next Unit
After the last preset is reached, the next Unit in the Song on the MDR is called up.
This function is available only when two or more Units are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a Song with more than 80 Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( : Top, : Next) will automatically be put at the end of the
Registrations you entered when Top or Next Unit is selected as the Shift End.
126 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Moreover, the
MDR allows you to perform various other operations to your Song data (such as copy, delete and convert).
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
Song data
USB flash drive
Copy
Delete
Convert
1
Calling Up the MDR Display
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR display. All operations related to the MDR, such as recording and playing your performances, can be done from the MDR display.
Reference Page
MDR Display
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the MDR display is open exits from the MDR display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the MDR display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 127
Page construction
SONG Page
2
Using the MDR Display
The MDR display consists of seven display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a specific function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the appropriate Page. For example, first select the SONG Page to select a target Song, then select TOOLS1 Page to copy/convert/delete the Song, or TEMPO Page to set the Repeat playback setting for the Song.
To select the desired Page, use Page buttons at the top right of the display on the panel. The TEMPO Page and PART Page below will be shown when you press the
[C] “SET.” (Setting) button in the SONG Page while the Song is selected.
TOOLS1 Page TOOLS2 Page
6
• Select target Song • Copy/Delete/Convert
Song
* You can copy folder or USB flash drive.
• Create Folder
• Format USB flash drive
Press the [C] “SET.” button while the Song is selected.
• Change Song/Folder name
• Confirm information of
Song/USB flash drive
Press the [D] “FINISH” button.
TEMPO Page PART 1 Page PART 2 Page PART 3 Page
• Song tempo, Repeat playback settings
• Custom Play
Part settings for Song Part settings for Song Part settings for XG
Song
NOTE
Keep in mind that the functions shown in the TOOLS1 and TOOLS2 Pages depend on the target selected in the SONG Page.
128 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
SONG Page:
7 6
1
2
4
5
3
1 Current USB Flash Drive/Folder
Displays the currently selected USB flash drive or folder. The contents included in 1 are listed as 2 below.
2 USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List
Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs.
3 Scroll bar
If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than 5 USB flash drive/folders/
Songs, you can scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial.
4 UP
Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [A] button.
5 IN
Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [B] button.
6 Page
Selects the Page of the display if the display contains two or more Pages.
7 Unit
Show the Unit name last used (shown as blank unless the UNIT is used).
If USB flash drive cannot be found:
Press the [A] “ changes to “ .”
” button several times until the indication
The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are more than three media selections, scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the desired USB flash drive.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 129
6
6
If Songs cannot be found:
1
Check the current USB flash drive/ folder (page 129
1).
2
If the desired Song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the Song.
If the desired Song is stored in a different folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial and the [A] “ ” and [B] “ ” buttons to select the folder in which the desired Song is stored.
Song icons
These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive, folder, and Song.
Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed in the USB flash drive/ folder list.
Indicates a folder.
Indicates that performance data is contained in the Song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 163 for details.
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 163 for details.
Indicates an XG-compatible Song.
130 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Media (USB flash drive) Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If you've saved hundreds of Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with similar Songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs you want.
Song
1
Song
4
Song
2
Song
5
Song
3
Song
6
Creating folders
Song 1
2 3
Folder 001
Song 4
5 6
Folder 002
USB flash drive
Song Song Song
USB flash drive
Songs:
A Song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single Song can contain both the recorded performance and
Registrations. A blank Song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.” When a Song containing the performance data is selected, a note icon ( ) appears in the display.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files. The file types listed below are created with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.)
Files in the Song
File
Performance data
Registration data
XG-converted data
Explanation
This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-compatible format.
Extension
.mid
.b00
.mid
In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone display.
NOTE
Audio files cannot be saved to a Song, even if created with the Audio Recording
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 131
6
Connecting a USB Device
You can connect a USB flash drive (sold separately) or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (pages
Precautions when using the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
This instrument features a built-in [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.
NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.
NOTE
• If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the
USB hub.
• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters.
• Do not connect an extension cable.
Using USB Flash Drives
By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.
Compatible USB devices
• USB flash drive
• USB hub
• USB wireless LAN adaptor
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.
The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.
Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/
Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument.
NOTE
The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/
500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.
Maximum number of USB flash drives allowed
Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB flash drives that can be recognized simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of four.)
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
You should format the USB flash drive only with this
instrument (page 133). A USB flash drive formatted on
another device may not operate properly.
NOTICE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive.
Connecting USB devices
When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.
NOTICE
• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover (if you use the separately sold key cover). If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged.
• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device during playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the
USB device. Failure to observe this may result in
“freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data.
• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations.
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive.
If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.
Turning off the instrument
When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during
Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data.
132 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB flash drive or an old one that has been used with other devices, you may need to format it. Formatting erases all the data in the USB flash drive and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB flash drive contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation.
Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminals.
Reference Page
2
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the MDR display.
3
Select the desired USB flash drive you want to format.
If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
4
Press the Page buttons at the top right of the display to call up the
TOOLS1 Page.
Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash drives are connected, which of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when you turn on the power to the instrument.
Currently selected USB flash drive name
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 133
6
NOTICE
Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during formatting. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data.
5
Press the [D] “FORMAT” button in the display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
6
Press the [C] “FORMAT” button to format the USB flash drive.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to SONG Page.
6
4
Selecting a Song
Reference Page
USB flash drive (Media)
Contents: Folders, Songs,
NOTICE
While the instrument is accessing data, do NOT remove the USB flash drive. (Some USB flash drives are equipped with an LED. The LED will flash while the USB flash drive is being accessed.)
In order to record your performance to the USB flash drive or to load Registrations in the USB flash drive back to the Electone, you will need to select a Song, as described below.
What is a Song?
You can think of a song as a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and Registrations.
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then press the [MDR] button.
MDR Display [SONG Page]
134 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Currently selected USB flash drive name
The SONG Page of the MDR display appears. In the SONG Page, you can select a blank Song for recording your performance or saving the Registration settings, or you can select a desired Song for playback.
2
Select the desired USB flash drive.
Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash drives are connected, which of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when you turn on the power to the instrument.
If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
3
Select a Song.
Press the [B] “ ” button to call up the Song/folder list contained in the
USB flash drive, then select the desired Song by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
NOTE
The “new song” file is a blank Song automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the Songs in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 100.
Select “new song” at the bottom of the list if you want to make a new recording or save data.
To simply play an existing Song, select the desired Song (containing data), referring to the Song name and icons. The selected Song is highlighted.
Song containing data
Blank Song (containing no data)
For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a
Reference Page
• Changing the Song/Folder
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 135
Reference Page
• Playing Back the Selected
• Changing the Tempo
Playback Settings
Pressing the [C] “SET.” button in the SONG Page of the MDR display while the Song is selected calls up a display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm the tempo/ repeat settings (TEMPO Page) or parts that are played when playing the Song (PART
Pages). These Pages can be switched by pressing the Page buttons in the order: TEMPO
PART 1 PART 2 PART 3.
When playing back the Song (by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo
(over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the Song contains no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.”
6
NOTE
The new Song is a blank
Song which is automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the Songs in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 100.
Selecting the Song in the Folder:
Keep in mind that the Song in the folder will not be shown in the display unless you open the folder which contains the Song. The illustrations below shows you how to use the display to access a specific Song in a folder of a USB flash drive (in this case, calling up the Song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”).
USB flash drive
(USB 01)
FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star new song SONG 001 new song
The illustration below shows the levels of folders and Songs in the USB flash drive.
Follow the dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired
Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
First level
(root directory)
1.
Press the [B] button
Second level in the root directory
FOLDER_001
USB flash drive (USB 01)
2.
Use the DATA CONTROL dial
FOLDER_002 SONG 001
Third level in the root directory
3.
Press the [B] button 4.
Use the DATA CONTROL dial
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star new song new song
Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.
136 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form:
1
Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display to call up the folder/Songs list in the selected USB flash drive.
FOLDER_001, FOLDER_002 and SONG_001 are displayed.
2
Select FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
3
Press the [B] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002.
In this case, already “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star” is selected.
4
Select the desired Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 137
5
Recording
MDR Recording
This lets you record your performance as a Song to a USB flash drive. A Song is comprised of your keyboard performance information and is not a recording of the actual sound itself. The performance information refers to which keys are played, at what timing, and at what strength — just as in a musical score. Based on the recorded performance information, the tone generator of the Electone outputs the corresponding sound. MDR also records Registrations such as Voice selection, effect settings and so on for future recall. In addition, this method enables you to record parts individually and rerecord a specific part.
Keep in mind that the Song recorded on the Electone using the MDR function is intended for playing back only on the Electone, so you cannot transfer the Song to other devices such as a portable music player for playing the Song on such devices. If you want to do so, record your performance as an audio file in the method described in Chapter 7
6
Recording
Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording.
Set the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in
Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the Song.
Reference Page
NOTE
When you record the Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button before pressing the [RECORD] button. For details, see
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the blank Song “new song” for recording your performance.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
138 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [RECORD] button in the
Music Data Recorder section on the panel.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the Electone is ready to record.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the top left on the panel to start the recording.
The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small indicator flashes across from left to right at the bottom left of the LCD display. This indicates that Registration data is currently being saved as a Unit to the Song.
Reference Page
5
After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing.
6
When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button.
Recording stops and your performance is written to the Song.
The Song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named like
“SONG_001.” You can change the Song name as desired. (For details, see
7
To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the
Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related
NOTICE
Do not remove the USB flash drive from the instrument during recording.
Outline of MDR Operation
Basically, the MDR independently records the following three types of data:
Registration data (including Bulk data)
All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the registration currently set to the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a Song, before the actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is also saved to the Song with the
Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices.
Performance data
The MDR records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone exactly as you play it, even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how hard you press them down while playing. The various types of performance data –
Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that you can change any one of them without affecting the others.
Control data
All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real time. These include registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and footswitches.
NOTE
Saving Registrations
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 139
6
NOTE
After exiting from the recording mode, you can rerecord your performance using the same Registration.
1
Select the Song you want to re-record.
After selecting the Song, select the TOOL1 Page with the Page buttons, then press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Press the [C]
“PERF. ONLY”
(Performance Only) button to delete only the performance data.
2
Load the Unit of the
Song to the Electone
3
Start recording in the normal way (and not in the way described in
“Re-recording” here.
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can simply re-record the song from the beginning.
1
Press the [RECORD] button while the Song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
Song. The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that you can re-record the Song.
2
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
3
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
Press the [STOP] button.
Reference Page
Recording Each Part Separately
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the Song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 can be recorded separately. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the Song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.
1
Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 138 to call up the Rec Standby
display.
140 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Select the Page PART 1 or PART 2 with the Page buttons.
3
Select the parts for recording.
In this case, set the Lower Keyboard (LOWER) and Pedalboard (PEDAL) to
“RECORD,” while other parts to “OFF.”
PART 1 Page PART 2 Page
NOTE
You should also set the
CONTROL to “REC,” in order to record Registration changes and expression pedal operation.
Each press of the [A] – [C] button corresponding to the desired part in the display toggles the status among PLAY, OFF and RECORD. Turn off the parts you don’t want to record, and make sure “PLAY” is selected for the parts you want to play and “RECORD” for the part you want to record.
PLAY:
OFF:
Playback of parts that have been recorded.
Recording or playback is not active.
RECORD: Recording of the part.
If you set the UPPER part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting LEAD to “REC,” however, records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the LOWER and KBP (Keyboard
Percussion) parts be recorded at the same time.
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] button is set to on.
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing.
5
Press the [STOP] button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case.
6
Press the [RECORD] button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button.
7
Select the PART Page with the Page buttons, then select the parts for recording.
Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts) to
“PLAY,” so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 141
6
If you want to change the part tempo for ease in recording, perform steps 8 and 9; otherwise, skip to step 10.
8
Select the TEMPO Page with the Page buttons.
9
Change the playback tempo, if desired.
The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Use the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the tempo.
10
Press the [C] button repeatedly, if necessary, to set “CUSTOM
PLAY” to ON to start recording of the new part or parts.
11
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel to start recording, then begin playing.
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The CUSTOM
PLAY function is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.
While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the
Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.
12
To stop the recording, press the [STOP] button.
142 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Punch-in Recording
This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific part(s) or all parts.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
NOTE
This function is best used when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song which contains the phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Reference Page
3
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the Song.
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording.
The current Song is stopped momentarily.
5
Press the [RECORD] button.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the MDR is ready to record.
6
Set the parts which you want to change to “RECORD” status and other parts to “PLAY.”
Part settings can be set in Pages PART 1 and PART 2. You can cancel the record standby mode at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.
Reference Page
7
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
8
Press the [STOP] button to quit punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 143
6
Changing the Song/Folder Name
NOTE
However, Song names of ELseries Electones, such as the
EL-900, cannot be changed.
Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded
Song, it’s best to give each Song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or even a date indicating when it was recorded.
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder whose name you want to change.
For details on selecting a Song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS2 Page.
6
NOTE
A blank Song cannot be named. Once a Song contains data, it can be named.
4
Press the [D] “CHANGE NAME” button.
The CHANGE NAME display appears.
Cursor
144 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [A] buttons.
Pressing the [A] button moves the cursor one step to the right, and holding moves the cursor to the right continuously. When the cursor reaches to the end of the name, it will return to the beginning of the name.
Cursor
6
Change the character at the cursor position.
Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for reverse order.
Blank
A – Z (capital)
NOTE
If “ENGLISH” is selected as the Language in the Utility
katakana characters are unavailable.
a – z (lower case)
Japanese katakana
Marks
Number 0 – 9
To delete a character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button.
When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved one step to the left.
To insert a character:
Move the cursor one step right to the position at which you want to enter the character, press the [B] button then use the DATA CONTROL dial.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 145
6
NOTE
An XG Song name can contain up to 46 characters.
7
Repeat steps 5 through step 6 above to finish entering the Song name.
Up to 50 characters can be entered.
8
After finishing, press the [D] “EXIT” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
9
To actually enter the change, press the [C] “CHANGE” button.
The renamed Song/folder is displayed.
An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C]
“CHANGE” button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used.
(The letters “xx” indicate numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT
MDR_xx.MID
MDR_xx.Bxx
SONG_xxx.C02
ELS_SONG.NAM
MDR_xxx.MID
REG_xxx.B00
SONG.NAM
MDR_xxx.TMP
REG_xxx.TMP
ELS_SONG.TMP
TMP
TMP.E02
MDR_xx.Vxx
146 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
7
Saving Registrations
You can also record Registration Memory data and other created data, separate from performance recording, as listed below. The data will be saved to a Unit of the selected Song.
Data saved to a Unit
Registration Memory 16 x 5 Banks
Registration Shift settings
Reverb Type, Disable mode, [DISABLE] button on/off status
User Keyboard Percussion
When loading Registration data containing the following data created on the ELS series,) User Rhythm data, Rhythm Sequence data, User Voice data, Voice Link data
Song
NOTE
Even if you’ve only created a couple of Registrations yourself, 16 separate
Registration Memory settings are always stored when saving to a Song—the factory preset Registrations being stored if no new settings have been made to the numbers.
NOTE
Units can be saved to Songs created on the ELS or ELB series, but not to Songs created on the EL series such as EL-900.
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory Bank A
Reference Page
Reference Page
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized
6
There are two ways to save Registrations.
Method 1
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
First make all the desired Electone settings to create your original
Registration.
Reference Page
3
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank Song).
Select “new song.” For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 147
4
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit) is selected.
5
Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, the Unit to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “UNIT 1,” and “SONG XXX” (XXX: number) is assigned as Song name to the destination Song.
Song name
6
Reference Page
Unit number
6
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
Method 2
1
First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select the destination (blank Song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above.
2
Press the [RECORD] button on the panel to enable recording on the MDR.
148 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then press the [STOP] button before the “00:00” indication is shown at the bottom left of the display.
This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The
“00:00” at the bottom left of the display indicates that the MDR is recording the
Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP] button interrupts this process.
Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song
When you want to use various Registrations exceeding five Registration Banks (one
Unit), you should save additional Registration Units to a Song.
Song
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory Bank A
NOTE
Although a maximum of 50
Units can be saved to a single Song, the actual amount may differ since the total number of Banks that can be saved to 5 Units is limited to 50. For example, saving 5 Banks to one Unit results in a maximum of 10
Units that can be saved to a
Song.
6
1
First make all the desired settings you want to save.
2
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
3
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song which includes Registration data.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 149
4
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
6
Reference Page
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
5
Select the blank Registration bank “NEW UNIT” to which you want to save the additional Registration bank, located at the bottom of the list, by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
6
Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
The Registration Unit will be added and follows previously contained Units.
NOTE
When playing back an EL
Song (created on the EL series, such as EL-900) which uses the Next Song function, the Unit data in the next Song will be loaded.
7
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
To play this Song, first press the [D] “EXIT” button to returns to the SONG
Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Keep in mind that when you play back this Song, the “UNIT 1” will be loaded to the Electone, but the next Unit will not be loaded unless you make the Next Unit settings of Registration Shift
150 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit
This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit without changing the performance data in already recorded Song data.
1
First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new
Registration.
2
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
3
Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired Song containing the Registration you wish to replace.
When a Song contains performance data, a note icon ( ) will appear at the left of the Song name.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Reference Page
4
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
5
Select the Registration Unit number you wish to overwrite by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
6
Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
7
Press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button to overwrite (replace).
8
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 151
6
Deleting Registrations
This function lets you delete the Registration Unit saved to a Song.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song containing the
Registrations you wish to delete.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
6
NOTE if you delete all the Units from a Song, that song will be deleted.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
4
Select the Registration Unit number you want to delete by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
5
Press the [C] “DEL.” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
6
Press the [C] “DELETE” button.
7
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
152 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance)
You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using 5 Bank of 16 Registrations, you can program a maximum of 400 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the
Regist Shift function described on page 123.
When playing back a Song which uses more than 80 Registration numbers, you can have two or more Registration Units saved to a single Song and recall them one by one as you play the Song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Unit.
1
Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Set the User Registration order.
Set the Registration Shift mode to USER, and select Next UNIT as the Shift End in Page 1 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, then set the Use Registration order in Page 2.
For details, see “To set the User Registration order” on page 123.
3
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4
Call up the UNIT EDIT display, then save the User Registration to
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit).
6
5
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
6
Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to save the Registration Units in the order you want to recall them in the same Song.
For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song” on
Once the Next Unit function has been turned on and set, you can use the function, following the steps below.
NOTE
When repeating steps 2 – 5 and making new Registration
Shift settings, delete the previous settings, then continue.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 153
6
7
Press the [MDR] button, and select the Song for which the Next
Unit function has been set.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 135 for instructions on selecting Songs.
8
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
If the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) display.
NOTICE
When you record a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to load the top Registration Unit
(UNIT 1) to the Electone by pressing the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button after selecting the desired song.
If you begin the recording procedure instead by pressing the [RECORD] button, even as another
Unit (UNIT 2, etc.) is loading, a message “The data currently loaded in the instrument is that of Unit xx. Are you sure you want to save the data to Unit 1?” will be shown. If you select
“OK,” Unit 1 will be overwritten by the current
Unit and will be lost.
NOTE
While a rhythm is playing, sequence data and User rhythm in the Registration data created on the Electone such as ELS series cannot be loaded.
9
As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified.
After finishing the play back of the first Unit, the next Unit begins loading automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right Footswitch.
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
8
Recalling Recorded Registrations
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to the Song can be easily loaded back to the
Electone.
Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration Unit (other than UNIT
1) from a Song which contains more than two Registration Units.
Loading Registrations
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button and select the Song containing the
Registrations you want to load back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
154 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
4
Select the Registration Unit number you want to load by using the
DATA CONTROL dial.
5
Press the [A] “LOAD” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
6
Press the [C] “LOAD” button.
A message appears, indicating the selected Unit including the 16 Registrations x 5 banks is currently being loaded. After the Registration data is loaded, the
LCD returns to the UNIT EDIT display.
7
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
NOTE
If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing,
User rhythms and sequence data created on the ELS series in the Registration data cannot be loaded.
6
9
Playing Back a Song
This section describes how to play back a Song recorded with the MDR and the commercially available Song data which can be played back with the MDR.
This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a Song when playing back your recorded performances. Thus, you can use the loaded
Registrations for your performance.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the Song to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
NOTICE
Since playing back a Song containing a Registration data will load the
Registration data (Unit 1) in the Song to the Electone, the Registration data memorized on the Electone will be overwritten and erased. Save your important Registration data on the Electone to the
USB flash drive, referring to “Saving Registrations.”
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Reference Page
NOTE
Audio files will not be shown in the MDR Display even when the USB flash drive contains audio files.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 155
6
Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance)
NOTE
Registration data is generally not included in most Song data, such as commercially available XG Songs created on instruments other than the
Electone.
3
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
A “-----” mark appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating the
Registration data is currently being loaded when the Song contains the
Registration data. When the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be loaded.
Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by the file name, indicating that only Registration data is included and there is no performance data. Starting playback of such a Song will load only Registration data, produce no sound, and return operation to the SONG Page.
4
When a Song contains performance data, playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data. (No sound will be produced if no performance data is included).
The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and Song playback starts (if the
Song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the Song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and play back only selected
parts (page 157). When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the Song by pressing the [STOP] button.
Although this Electone can play Songs created on other Electones, such as the ELS series, the sound or tempo of the Song may differ from the original.
Reference Page
Custom Play
If you want to play back the Song without resetting the Registrations, use the Custom
Play function. Turn the CUSTOM PLAY to ON in the TEMPO Page, then press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. This displays the Song time and starts playback immediately.
When you play a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to turn CUSTOM PLAY to OFF in the TEMPO Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the Song.
156 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Playing Back Selected Parts
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
To play back the selected part(s):
Before or during playback, use the [A] – [C] buttons to turn the parts you want to play back to “PLAY” and the parts you want to mute to “OFF.” Pressing the corresponding button toggles the part setting between PLAY and OFF.
The XG part setting can be set in the PART 3 Page.
Reference Page
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause
Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [REW] (Rewind) button or [FF]
(Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve reversed to or advanced, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or Songs, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the Song was paused, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 157
6
Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is playing in the MDR display, either while the Song is stopped or while it is playing. Since the procedure for changing the tempo is differ depends on whether the Song has an icon or not, confirm if the desired Song has an icon or not.
icon is included:
You can change the tempo in the following procedure.
icon is not included:
You can change the tempo by re-recording the tempo saved in the Registration data of the Song.
Copy the Song for which you want to change the tempo, then play the edit (copied)
Song to load the Registration data to the Electone for editing. Recall the desired
Registration for editing by pressing the Registration numbered button, and change the tempo with the TEMPO button on the panel, then record the changed tempo to the Registration numbered button. Repeat these steps for all numbered buttons you want to change the tempo. After finishing the settings, save (overwrite) the
Registration data to the edit Song.
1
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song with icon to be played back.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
2
Press the [C] “SET.” button to call up the TEMPO Page.
158 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Change the Tempo in the TEMPO Page.
Press the [A] button to select “TEMPO,” then press the same button successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo, while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Repeat Playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all Songs on a folder or only one specific Song.
1
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song you wish to repeatedly play back.
If you wish to play back all Songs on a folder, select the first Song that will be played back.
For details on selecting a Song or folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
2
Press the [C] “SET.” button, then press the Page buttons to select the TEMPO Page.
3
Select the repeat mode.
Press the [B] button to select “REPEAT,” then press the same button successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
1 Off
Cancels repeat playback.
2 Single
Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.
3 All
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in order.
4 Random
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
1 OFF
2 SINGLE
3 ALL
4 RANDOM
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 159
6
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback.
To cancel the repeat setting, select “OFF” for the repeat mode.
6
Reference Page
Reference Page
Playing Back XG Songs
The Electone allows you to playback XG Song data, created on the computer or converted from Electone Song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with Songs (performances) recorded on the Electone.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the XG song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Press the [C] “SET.” Button, then press the Page buttons to select the PART Page.
You can set the volume or mute settings for each part.
1
2
3
1 Part
Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part to mute/ play or to change the volume.
Press the [A] button to select “XG PART CH,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
2 Playback/Off
Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off). Select “PLAY” for the part you want to play back and select “OFF” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B] button to select
“XG,” then press the same button successively to select the setting.
3 Volume
You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100.
Press the [C] button to select “XG VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
When the selected Song contains an XG part, you can adjust the XG part on/off setting and volume from Page 3, in the same way as you did with the XG Songs.
160 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
10
Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc.
The TOOLS Pages in the MDR display has many functions, such as Song copy, Song delete, confirming the Song size, etc., as well as creating or deleting folders.
Copy
This function lets you copy a folder/Song, or even a USB flash drive. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different USB flash drives. (For Songs created on EL-series instruments, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination drive in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 Songs, Copy is not available.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
If you want to copy a Song between two different drives, you will need to insert the destination USB flash drive.
Reference Page
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the folder/Song/USB flash drive to be copied.
For details on selecting folder/Song/USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
3
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.
6
4
Press the [A] “COPY” button to call up the COPY TO Display.
Copy Destination
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 161
6
Reference Page
About Protected Songs
5
As necessary, select the destination (highlighted).
Select folder or USB flash drive as the copy destination. You can even select the destination from another USB flash drive.
For details on selecting folder/ USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
If you want to copy the Song/folder to the same place which contains the source
Song/folder, press the [A] “ ” button when the COPY TO display appears to make the folder/drive which contains source Songs/folders as the destination.
About Copying Protected Songs
Protected Original Songs or Protected Edit Songs can be copied as long as you select the same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you select another folder/drive, the message “Song xx will be moved.” will be displayed. If you select
“OK,” the currently selected Protected Original Song and Protected Edit Song created from a Protected Original Song are all moved to another folder/drive you have specified.
In this case, the data is not copied, but moved.
NOTE
• If the USB flash drive copy operation is executed, the folder name “#MEDIA” will be created in the destination folder.
• If a “Path name is too long” message is displayed, change the hierarchy or rename the folder name to make it shorter.
• The copy operation will automatically be stopped if an unrecognizable file is detected in the folder.
6
Press the [C] “EXE.” button to execute the copy.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.
The folder/Song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source
Song/folder. If you copy a folder/ Song to a folder that contains a Song whose name is the same as the source Song, the copied name will be “source Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number). If you copy an XG-compatible
Song to another folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with the same name as the source Song, a message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the Song. Selecting “OVERWRITE” overwrites the XG-compatible
Song in the destination. Selecting “CANCEL” cancel the operation.
If you want to change the folder/Song name, see page 144.
NOTICE
Never attempt to remove the USB flash drive or turn the power off during copying (or moving a
Protected Song). Data may be lost.
7
When copying the folder or USB flash drive, the approximate time of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that the actual time necessary may differ. Proceed by following the message in the display.
Press the [D] button to cancel, or [C] button to execute the operation.
If you want to cancel the copy operation while the copy operation is in progress, press the [D] “INTERRUPT” button. Keep in mind, however, that cancelling the operation may take a long time, since the operation is stopped only after all files in the current folder are copied.
If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which files have been properly copied and which have not.
162 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download Song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to prevent accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership). These are called “Protected Songs.” A Protected Song can be played back in the same way as Songs you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format. Registration data in the
Protected Song cannot be edited, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If you want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy.
(You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copied Song (called “Protected Edit
Song”) is available only when the original Song (called “Protected Original Song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the Protected Original song.
Folder
Protected
Original Song
Protected Edit
Song
Copy
This Song cannot be edited This Song can be edited, but only when it is in the folder that contains a Protected Original Song.
NOTICE
If you move or copy the protected Song data on the computer without the Musicsoft
Downloader application, the Song cannot be played back. Always use Musicsoft Downloader when moving or copying protected Songs on the computer.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://download.yamaha.com/
NOTICE
When you want to edit a protected Song, turn the power to the instrument off and back on again, then select the Song to be edited. (The Registration data of the previous protected
Song will be initialized.) Otherwise the edited protected Song may not be saved.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 163
6
NOTICE
If the folder you are deleting contains audio files, deleting the folder deletes all the audio files as well as Songs in the folder. Use of separate
USB flash drives — one for
Songs, one for audio files
— is highly recommended for data protection.
However, at very least, you should use separate folders.
Song Delete/Folder Delete
These operations let you delete Songs and folders. (Only Songs created with the ELseries, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.)
Before proceeding, make sure to confirm from the AUDIO display that no audio files exist in the folder you are deleting, since the MDR display will not show any audio files, even when the folder contains audio files.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Reference Page
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder you want to delete.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.
4
Press the [B] “DELETE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
5
Press the appropriate [A] – [D] button corresponding to the specific data you want to delete: “DELETE” or “PERF. ONLY.”
Selecting “DELETE” deletes the entire Song, and selecting “PERF.
ONLY” deletes only performance data in the Song.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.
164 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Creating folders
1
Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the media/folder within which you want to create the new folder.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Press the [B] button to open the media/folder.
4
Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.
Reference Page
5
Press the [D] “CREATE FOLDER” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
6
Press the [C] “OK” button.
The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_001,” or similar.
Up to 120 folders can be created.
For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 144.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 165
6
Converting to XG format
This function allows you to convert ELB-02 Song data to XG format data. You can play back the data using XG devices. The converted XG Song data may not sound the same as the original data.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available.
Protected Songs cannot be converted to XG format.
Reference Page
1
Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song you want to convert to XG format to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song to be converted to
XG format.
Select the desired Song (having the icon at left of its name).
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3
Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.
4
Press the [C] “CONVERT” button.
A display for selecting conversion type appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
166 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Press the [C] “CNV. XG” button.
6
After the CONVERT TO display is called up for selecting the convert destination, select the destination of the converted data.
Select the USB flash drive or folder as the destination. See steps 2 and 3 on
page 135 for instructions on selecting the destination.
7
Press the [C] “EXE.” button to start conversion.
8
A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data, and the converted Song is played back.
The song converted to XG format is automatically named such as
“XGSONG001.”
For instructions on changing the Song name, see page 144.
For details on XG Songs, refer to “Playing Back XG Songs” on page 160.
NOTE
Do not play the keyboard or press any of the panel controls during the confirmation of the conversion, since these actions will be recorded to the converted XGcompatible
Song.
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 167
6
Checking the Remaining Memory
When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS2 Page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the remaining memory in the
USB flash drive. When a Song is selected on the TOOLS2 page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the data size, amount of
Registration Banks, Song title, composer of the Song, etc. The indicated items differ depending on what is selected.
Reference Page
1
Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button, then select a Song or USB flash drive.
For details on selecting a Song or USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
3
Call up the TOOLS2 Page with the Page buttons.
4
Press the [C] “INFORMATION” button to call up the information.
When a USB flash drive is selected:
REMAIN: Remaining memory in the USB flash drive
ID:
Displays “Found” or “Missing” to indicate if the USB flash drive can handle the Protected Song for ELB series or ELS series or not. “Found” indicates the USB flash drive can handle the data, while “Missing” indicates that it cannot.
When a Song is selected:
SIZE: Song data size
BANK: Amount of Registration Banks
168 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
7
Audio
The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash drive. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to enjoy as well.
Audio file Audio file Audio file
USB flash drive Computer External audio device
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data, follow the notices below.
important data, and to use it only for audio recording/playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in the same drive may cause severe fragmentation of the USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback altogether.
• Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from sudden shaking while performing, etc. during audio recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected while recording, it may result in data corruption in the USB flash drive.
1
Recording Your Performance as Audio
Audio Recording
With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an audio file.
An Audio file is a recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer. You can also record the sound of an external device since all the sounds produced via your keyboard performance and the sound input from the [AUX IN] jack will be recorded.
Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used to save Registrations. If you
want to save Registrations, perform the “Recording” operation described on page 138 in
chapter 6.
NOTE
When recording audio that is input from the [AUX IN] jack to the USB flash drive, the output volume of the external audio device connected to this instrument cannot be controlled by the Electone.
Adjust the volume level from the control on the external audio device.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 169
Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB flash drive.
Maximum amount of recording time is 60 minutes per recording, though this may be less depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash drive.
NOTE
The file extension does not appear in the Electone display. However, it can be viewed on a computer.
File format that can be recorded
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
Reference Page
1
Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
NOTE
Songs you've created on the
Electone will not be shown in the AUDIO Display even when the USB flash drive contains Songs.
2
Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to call up the AUDIO display.
AUDIO Display
7
NOTE
The “new audio” file is a blank audio file automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the audio files in the USB flash drive/folder is less than
120.
3
Select the blank audio file “new audio” for recording your performance.
To find “new audio,” press the [B] “ ” button in the display of step 2 to open the USB flash drive, then select “new audio” by using the DATA
CONTROL dial.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
4
Press the [C] “REC.” button to engage the Record Standby status.
170 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Start recording by pressing the [C] “RECORD” button, and then start your performance.
When recording begins, the elapsed recording time is shown in the lower left of the AUDIO RECORD display.
Once the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load the Registration or play the Song with the MDR.
NOTICE
Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data.
Elapsed recording time
6
When you finish playing, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Recording stops and the audio file to which your performance is recorded is automatically named and selected in the AUDIO display.
7
To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [C] “PLAY” button twice.
Reference Page
Deleting files/Renaming files
AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page]
Recording the Song playback as audio file
Once you've recorded your performance as a Song using MDR function, you can record the playback of the Song as an audio file.
1
Connect two compatible USB flash drives, one containing the
Song, and another for recording audio files, to the USB TO
DEVICE terminals.
2
Start audio recording (perform steps 2 – 5 above.)
3
Select the Song on the MDR Display, then start playback of the
Song.
Playback the Song to the end of the Song.
4
Stop the audio recording (perform steps 6 and 7 above).
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 171
7
2
Playing Back Audio Files
NOTE
This instrument cannot play back DRM protected files.
Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive connected to this instrument.
File format that can be played back
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio file to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
NOTE
Songs you've recorded using the MDR function on this Electone and Protected
Songs will not be shown in the AUDIO Display, even when the USB flash drive contains Songs.
2
Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to call up the AUDIO display.
AUDIO Display
7
NOTE
The “new audio” file is a blank audio file automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the audio files in the USB flash drive/folder is less than
120.
3
Select the desired audio file for playback.
To simply play an existing audio file, select the desired audio file (containing data), referring to the audio file name and icon “ .”
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
172 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the PLAY Page of the AUDIO
PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
NOTE
AUDIO PLAY display consists of two different pages: “PLAY” or “SET.”
(Setting). Use the Page buttons to select the appropriate page.
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]
5
Press the [C] “PLAY” button to start playback.
When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in the lower left of the display.
6
Press the [D] “FINISH” button to stop playback.
The display returns to the AUDIO display.
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause
NOTICE
Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data.
7
Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [A] “REW” (Rewind) button or
[B] “FF” (Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the [C]
“PLAY” button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file press the [C] “PAUSE” button. To resume playback from the point at which the audio file was paused, press the [C] “PLAY” button again.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 173
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch
You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio file as the file is playing.
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [AUDIO] button.
3
Select the desired audio file for playback.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
4
Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the AUDIO PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]
7
174 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
Press the Page buttons to select the “SET.” (Setting) Page.
1
2
3
In this Page, you can make other audio playback settings.
1 To adjust the Volume:
Press the [A] button to select “VOLUME,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [A] button.
Range: 0 – 127
2 To Change the Tempo:
Press the [B] button to select “TEMPO,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [B] button. The value can be adjusted from 75% to 125% and the default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo.
If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value.
3 To Change the Pitch:
Press the [C] button to select “PITCH,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. This let you shift the pitch of an audio file in semitone steps (from -12 to 12). If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value (0).
NOTE
Changing the playback tempo or pitch of an audio file may change its tonal characteristics.
NOTE
Volume, tempo and pitch changes are temporary; these values revert to their defaults when the power is turned off and then back on again.
6
After setting, go back to the PLAY Page with the Page buttons, and then play the audio file to hear and check the changes you’ve made in the SET. Page.
7
If you are satisfied with the sound, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Audio playback is stopped (if the file is being played back) and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
7
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 175
Deleting the File / Changing the File Name
You can delete the file or change the file name.
Reference Page
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio files to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2
Press the [AUDIO] button.
3
Select the desired audio file.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
4
Press the [D] “TOOL” button to call up the AUDIO TOOLS Page.
In this Page, you can delete or rename the audio file.
AUDIO TOOLS Display
1
2
7
Reference Page
1 To delete the file:
Press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. If you want to delete the file, press the [C] “DELETE” button. The audio file will be deleted and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
2 To rename the file:
Press the [C] “CHANGE NAME” button to call up the rename display. For details on
how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144.
After entering the characters, press the [D] “FINISH” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. To finalize the name, press the [C] “CHANGE” button. The audio file will be renamed and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
To exit from the AUDIO TOOLS Page, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
176 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
8
Footswitches
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effects on/off, without needing to take your hands from the keyboard. The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal.
Left Footswitch Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
Right Footswitch
The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. For details on the
Registration Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on
2
Left Footswitch
The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or
Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the Left Footswitch (in the FOOT SWITCH
(LEFT) Page) are given here.
1
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
NOTE
Pressing the [FOOT
SWITCH] button calls up one of two different displays:
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) or
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT). Use the Page buttons to select the appropriate display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 177
8
Reference Page
2
Call up the FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) display.
Use the page buttons to select page 3.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT)
Display
1 OFF
2 RHYTHM
3 GLIDE
4 ROTARY SPEAKER
In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control:
Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Each press of the [A] button selects the functions in sequence: Off Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker. When Off is selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive.
1 Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.
2 Rhythm
When this is selected, one of the control settings appears below. Press the [B] button as necessary to select the desired control setting.
2 -1 STOP
2 -2 BREAK
2 -3 MAIN A – MAIN D
2 -4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
2 -5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
2 -6 OFF
2 - 1 Stop
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch.
2 - 2 Break
This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you press the Left Footswitch, the Break section is played.
178 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2 - 3 Main A – Main D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
2 - 4 Intro 1 – Intro 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the Left
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
2 - 5 Ending 1 – Ending 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.
For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the
Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops.
2 - 6 Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.
3 Glide
This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the Left
Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
When the Glide setting is chosen, two separate Glide pages are available, with the current page number shown at the top right side of the display. You can select the pages by using the Page buttons.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Display
[Glide Page 3]
3 - 1
[Glide Page 4]
3 - 2
3 - 1 Time
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch returns to normal when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower pitch changes.
Range: 1 – 5
3 - 2 Lead 1/2, Upper1/2, Lower 1/2
Turn on the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons. Each press of the corresponding button toggles between on and off.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 179
8
Reference Page
4 Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch. When the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the
Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the “Speed
Control” in the Rotary Speaker display. To use this function, you’ll need to make the
appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section. For details, see page 60.
8
180 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
9
Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch.
Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
2
Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the Page buttons.
1
2
In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings.
Press the [A] button to change the Transpose setting, or press [B] button to change the Pitch setting.
1 Transpose
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
2 Pitch
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2
Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. (See page 58 for details.)
NOTE
These are overall pitch controls; the actual pitch of a
Voice section will be affected accordingly and may differ if that Voice section’s pitch has been changed. For example, if the Transpose value is set to “+1” here and the
Transpose value for Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 is set to
“+1” in the Voice Condition display, the overall pitch of the instrument becomes
“+1,” but the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 pitch setting becomes “+2.”
NOTE
The Transpose setting here does not affect XG Songs
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 181
10
Connections
On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below.
1
Accessory Jacks and Controls
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For
details on connecting to external devices, see page 184.
1 2 3
Reference Page
Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the
1 [AUX IN] (stereo mini) jack
For connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers.
Reference Page
2 AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] (standard phone) jacks
This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system.
The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME dial.
Reference Page
3 [PHONES] jack
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others.
182 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
For connecting a USB flash drive. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive. You can also use this to connect a USB wireless
LAN adaptor (sold separately) for connecting the instrument to an iPhone/iPad via wireless LAN.
Reference Page
• Connecting to an iPhone/ iPad (page 192)
5 6 7
Front (keyboard side)
5 MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
6 [USB TO HOST] terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.
Reference Page
• Controlling the Electone from an External Device
7 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
Same as “ 4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.”
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 183
10
CAUTION
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device.
When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument.
NOTICE
Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the AUX
OUT jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment.
NOTE
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.
2
Connection Examples — External
Devices
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
External Audio System
By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack (standard phone).
AUX OUT [L/L+R]
Speaker (Left)
[R]
Speaker (Right)
By connecting the Electone to an external audio device instead of speakers, you can record your Electone performance to that device.
Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the Electone
By connecting a cable from the external audio device to the [AUX IN] jack, you can play back the sound of the external device via the speakers of the Electone.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, then to the external device.
NOTE
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.
External audio device
Stereo mini plug
[AUX IN]
Stereo mini plug
Playback sound
184 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note information as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted.
Tone generator
MIDI [OUT] MIDI IN
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
Controlling the Electone from an External Device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your
Electone.)
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted.
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
MIDI [IN] MIDI OUT
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 185
10
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer.
3
Connection with Computer
By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal or MIDI terminals, you can connect the
Electone and computer enabling the MIDI communication between both. Install the
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection between the
Electone and computer. Regarding the USB-MIDI driver, you can download the latest version from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your
Electone.
Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal
Using the Electone’s [USB TO HOST] terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the Electone and the computer.
Computer
10
186 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
[USB TO HOST]
USB cable
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
NOTICE
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.
• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, disable any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/ unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)
• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
4
MIDI
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.
What is MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production
L
Internal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Internal amp
R
Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound.
Playing the keyboard
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what Voice)
Note number (with which key)
Note on (when was it pressed) &
Note off (when was it released)
Velocity (about how strong)
01 (grand piano)
60 (C3)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
120 (strong)
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 187
10
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
10
MIDI Messages of the Electone
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
Manual.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel.
Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone.
For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha
System Messages
System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data.
188 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.
Weather Report
1
NEWS
NEWS
2
2
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends
MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI
Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
MIDI cable
MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2
The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard
(Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 191 for more information.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 189
10
10
190 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
5
MIDI Control
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the Electone is controlled.
To select the MIDI page:
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 4 – 5.
2
Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 4 – 5.
Internal/External Display
1
2
3
Internal/External
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or the connected device (External).
1 Lead1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice 1.
Successive presses of the [A] button alternates between Internal and External.
Internal: Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper Keyboard of the Electone. (If the
To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.)
External: Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4.
2 Synchro
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization purposes.
Successive presses of the [B] button alternates between Internal and External.
Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on the panel enables control of and synchronization to any connected devices
(e.g., sequencer, etc.).
External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts the rhythm of the Electone.
3 Expression
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to Auto.
Successive presses of the [C] button alternate among Auto, Internal and External.
Auto:
Internal and External is automatically switched.
Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during MDR. playback.
External: While playing the MDR or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal has no effect. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a
USB flash drive or received MIDI data.)
MIDI Out Channel Display
1
2
3
4
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted.
Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper
Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent over the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.
1 Upper Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
2 Lower Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
3 Pedalboard
You can select the channel for the Pedalboard.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
4 Rhythm
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone.
Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone.
Successive presses of the [D] button alternate between being transmitted (FILTER
OFF) and not transmitted (FILTER ON).
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 191
10
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
Manual.
6
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad to the instrument. By using an application tool on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.
For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the
For information about compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
NOTE
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
Connection with a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately):
The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly. For details about the USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately), contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the distributor listed at the end (or beginning) of this manual. Or you can access the following website and contact
Yamaha support at your location.
http://www.yamaha.com/contact/
To connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly, follow the instructions in the
“iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website, and also refer back to the
Owner’s Manual (this book) for the specific Wireless LAN settings (below) which you’ll need to make for wireless connection.
10
Reference Page
• Wireless LAN Detailed
• Initialize the settings in the wireless LAN settings
NOTICE
When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to
“ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
NOTICE
Do not place your iPhone/ iPad in an unstable position. Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in damage.
NOTE
Before using the USB [TO
DEVICE] terminal, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE]
Wireless LAN settings
Start wireless connection according to the instructions in the “iPhone/iPad
Connection Manual” on the website, then make sure to make appropriate setups from the following instructions: “Display the Networks and connecting to the access point,” “Automatic Setup by WPS,” “Manual Setup” or “Connecting by the Adhoc
Mode.” Refer to pages 192 – 196 in this Owner’s Manual, then set up as required.
If there is no access point, follow the instructions in “Connecting by the Adhoc
Automatic Setup by WPS
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE,” if necessary.
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
192 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
WIRELESS LAN Display
3
Press the [B] “WPS” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
4
Press the [C] “OK” button to start WPS setup, then press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes.
Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully.
5
After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 193
10
10
194 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and connecting to a network
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
WIRELESS LAN Display
Network list
3
Press the [A] “UPDATE” button to call up the network list.
For a network with a lock icon ( ), you need to enter the proper password.
4
Connect the instrument to the desired network.
4-1
Select the desired network by using the DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The name of the selected network will be fully shown in the display, letting you confirm this is the network you want to use.
4-2
Press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
• For a network without a lock icon:
Connecting starts.
• For a network with a lock icon ( ):
You need to enter the proper password. For details on how to enter characters,
refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
password, press the [D] button to finalize the setting. This operation starts connecting automatically.
Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully.
5
After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
Manual Setup
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
WIRELESS LAN Display
Network list
3
Select “OTHER” at the bottom of the network list by using the
DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The OTHER display will be shown. The OTHER display consists of two different pages that can be switched by using the Page buttons.
1 2
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 195
10
NOTE
The password cannot be set when you select “NONE” for the security setting.
4
Set the SSID, Security and Password to the same as the settings on the access point.
1 SSID
Press the [A] button on page 1 to call up the display for SSID input, then enter the SSID.
For details on how to enter the characters, refer to “Changing the Song/Folder Name”
on page 144. Up to 32 characters (half size), alphanumeric characters, marks can be
entered. After entering the SSID, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.
2 Security
Press the [A] button on page 2 to call up the Security list, then select the desired setting by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [C] “CHANGE” button to finalize the setting.
3 Password
Press the [B] button on page 2 to call up the display for Password input, then set the password in the same way as SSID. Press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.
5
Press the [C] “CNCT.” button to start connection.
Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully.
6
After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
10
Reference Page
Connecting by the Adhoc Mode
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode to “ADHOC.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2
The settings for the instrument are complete if you do not need to change the SSID and so on. Connect the iPhone/iPad to the instrument by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the ADHOC display pages.
196 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Wireless LAN Mode
1
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN option display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 7.
The currently selected Mode name is shown.
Mode
2
Set the Wireless LAN mode.
You can set between two modes: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC. Press the
[B] “MODE CHANGE” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of the operation, then press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 197
10
Reference Page
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings
You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC.
No need to change or set the settings if you’ve done the connection between iPhone/ iPad and instrument.
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed settings by pressing the [D] button in the Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6) or the Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)
Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6)
INFRASTRUCTURE mode ADHOC mode
Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)
INFRASTRUCTURE mode/
ADHOC mode
DETAIL display Page 1 ADHOC display Page 1 DETAIL display
10
DETAIL display Page 2 ADHOC display Page 2
ADHOC display Page 3
198 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
2
As necessary, set the detailed settings.
Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to “CHANGE” or “SHOW” in the display to call up the display for Setting/Input.
Wireless LAN mode
INFRASTRUCTURE mode
Display
DETAIL display
Page 1
ADHOC mode
DETAIL display
Page 2
ADHOC display
Page 1
ADHOC display
Page 2
ADHOC display
Page 3
INFRASTRUCTURE mode /
ADHOC mode
DETAIL display
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
SSID
Item
Channel
Security
Password
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
HOST NAME
MAC address
STATUS
Default setting Setting/Input
ON
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
ap-ELB-02-(last 6 characters of MAC address in lowercase); or simply “ap-ELB-02,” if MAC address cannot be used.
11
–
–
ON
192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
ELB-02-(last 6 characters of MAC address in lowercase); or simply “ELB-02,” if
MAC address cannot be used.
–
00000000
Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here.
Select on or off by using the DATA CONTROL dial then press the [C] “CHANGE” button.
Set the wireless LAN detailed settings. IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS Server1, DNS Server2 can be set when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be set when DHCP set to On. For details on confirmation and changes in the setting of the access point on the router side, refer to the owner’s manual for the product you are using.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to the
“Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. The
setting range is 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255.
To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address” below.
• SSID, Security and Password can be set in the same way as those described in the section “Manual
Setup” on page 195. The last 6 characters of the
MAC address must be entered in lowercase.
• Channel can be selected by the DATA CONTROL dial and set by pressing the button corresponding to
“CHANGE.”
• DHCP and IP Address can be set in the same way as those of “INFRASTRUCTURE mode” in this table.
• Subnet Mask can be selected in the list.
To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address” below.
Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters (half size) including alphanumeric characters, the “_”
(underscore) and “-” (hyphen) character. For details on how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the
Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
characters, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.
The last 6 characters of the MAC address must be entered in lowercase.
Shows the MAC address of the USB wireless LAN adaptor. You cannot change the MAC address here.
Shows the error code of network function.
10
3
Save the settings.
Press the [D] “EXIT” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation when there is a change in the setting. Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or press the [D] button to cancel. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the previous display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 199
10
200 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Initialize the wireless LAN settings
Factory Set (page 27) does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings, which
can be initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize, since it erases all the wireless LAN settings and replaces them with the factory defaults.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the UTILITY display, then select Page 7 by using the Page buttons.
2
Initialize the wireless LAN setting.
Press the [C] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or the [D] button to cancel.
Glossary of Terms
Access point
Ad Hoc mode
DHCP
DNS SERVER
A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by wireless LAN.
Some access points are combined with modem functions.
Communication method for performing data communication with the terminal and other devices directly without using a relay device, such as an access point of a wireless LAN.
A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument connect to the Internet.
A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices connected to a network.
A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems.
GATEWAY
Infrastructure mode
IP ADDRESS
LAN router
Site
SSID
SUBNET
MASK
Communication method for performing data communication with each terminal via a relay device, such as an access point of the wireless LAN.
A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network that indicate the device’s location on the network.
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha instrument) to share the same Internet connection.
Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the
Yamaha site.
A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless networks set as the access point.
The structure for dividing a large-scale network.
Wireless LAN
WPS
A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cablefree connection.
A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only the WPS buttons of an access point and the wireless LAN device.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 201
10
11
Appendix
Assembly Instructions
CAUTION
• Assemble the unit on a hard and flat floor with ample space.
• Be careful not to confuse or misplace the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence described here.
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
• Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.
• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
• To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
1
Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and carefully place the main unit on top of the pads as shown.
2
Take out all parts from the package.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. When you take out the Speaker Unit, always hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net.
Dust Cover
Music Rest
Main Unit
Grill Net
Attached to the Speaker
Unit
Styrofoam pads
Take out the styrofoam pads, and place the Main Unit on top of the pads.
Bundled pedal cord inside.
Sideboard
(Left)
Sideboard
(Right)
Bench
Speaker Unit
Bench Board
Legs: 4 pcs.
Pedalboard Unit
Assembly parts
A
5 x 16 mm x 4
B
5 x 12 mm x 8
Power cord
Cord holders x 4
Screw caps x 4
202 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard unit.
Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left
Sideboards.
3-1
Untie (at three points) and straighten out the bundled pedal cord.
3-2
Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration below.
3-3
Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using four screws (B; two screws on each Sideboard).
4-3
While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker unit, fasten the four screws (B) from the rear, to secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover the four screw holes on the rear side with the corresponding screw caps.
Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit
Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit
B
Screw caps
B
Screw caps
Push the Sideboard toward the Pedalboard
B
3-4
Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.
4
Mount the Speaker Unit onto the
Sideboards.
4-1
Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.
5
Affix the two cord holders to the top surface of the Speaker unit, then insert the
Power cord in the holders as shown in the illustration.
Make sure to place the connector of the power cord at the front side, and the plug of the power cord at the back side.
Clamp the holder shut after inserting the cord.
4-2
With the help of another person, hold the Speaker unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into place along the brackets.
6
Mount the Main Unit.
6-1
As shown in the illustration, hold the Main Unit horizontally (with two people), and mount the Main
Unit. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it.
CAUTION
Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.
15 cm or further in
CAUTION
Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 203
11
6-2
Use the four screws (A) to fasten the Main unit to the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.
8
Plug the power cord into the AC IN jack on the bottom surface of the main Unit.
A
9
Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord to the Main Unit.
Remove the protective film applied to each connector of the cords. Make sure that the latches on each connector of the cords face toward you, and connect them to each socket securely until the latch is set. Once connected securely, the connector cannot be accidentally disconnected, even if you pull the connector gently downward. (If disconnected, the pedals will not function properly.)
7
Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.
First, align the net with the bottom line, then secure it to the speaker assembly.
Speaker cord
Pedalboard cord
To disconnect the
Pedalboard cord and
Speaker cord:
Press the bottom of the latch to unlatch, then disconnect.
10
Affix the two cord holders to the inside of the side board, then insert the Pedalboard cord in the holders as shown in the illustration.
Clamp the holder shut after inserting the cord.
11
204 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Fasten the Grill Net by inserting the knobs into the holes.
11
Place the music rest on the Electone.
12
Turn on the Electone’s [ P](Standby/On) switch and confirm that the Electone can be played, and that the assembly is successful.
After completing the assembly, please check the following items.
• Are there any parts left over?
→ Review all assembly procedures.
• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable fixtures?
→ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.
• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when you shake it?
→ Tighten all screws.
• Can the Electone be turned on?
→ Confirm that the power cord plug is securely connected to an appropriate power outlet.
• Does the Electone produce sounds?
→ How to produce sounds is described in “Quick
Introductory Guide.” Confirm that the Speaker cord connector and the Pedalboard cord connector are securely connected to each socket on the Main unit.
When moving the instrument
CAUTION
When moving the instrument, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
Do not hold here.
BENCH ASSEMBLY
Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place, one by one, at the corners of the bench board, then tighten each nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer between each leg and nut as shown.
Leg
Washer
Bench board
Nut
Hold here.
• Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled), or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument.
CAUTION
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 205
11
Troubleshooting
11
Problem
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on.
A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard.
Possible Cause and Solution
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs.
Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with an application on an iPhone/iPad.
The sound of the Electone causes surrounding objects to resonate.
Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
• The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around The minimum position. Turn it
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe
• The speaker cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the speaker cord to
The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug to
The Pedal Voices do not sound, and the expression pedal does not work.
The “Connection interrupted; problem occurred in USB device.” message is shown and the USB device does not respond.
The Electone panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed.
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of a problem. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/ or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone.
VOICES/RHYTHMS
When a key is pressed, two or more
Voices sound.
The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards.
Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or
Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or set
the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page 36).
As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
206 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Problem
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.
Possible Cause and Solution
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 10 notes.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time.
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set.
When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard.
Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound.
EFFECTS
The Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch
Vibrato function do not operate.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off
the mode in the display (page 82).
• TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 88).
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button.
• Adjust the Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato settings in the Voice
• Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in the Voice
The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the
REVERB button setting on the panel is increased.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the “Speed Control” in the Rotary Speaker display is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display (page 57).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate
Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started.
The harmony notes of the Melody On
Chord function cannot be heard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 81).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
The instrument does not recognize the connected USB flash drive.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 112.
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the
Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 207
Problem
Recording or playback cannot be performed.
Recording is stopped before the performance is finished.
An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name.
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.
The USB flash drive cannot be formatted when you want to format an unformatted drive.
An error message is shown when you edit the Protected Edit Song.
Possible Cause and Solution
• The part may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY in the PART 1 and PART 2 Pages.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB.
• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded Song, then record again (page 164).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB.
• The Song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters.
• The Song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 146.
• The path name is too long. Reduce the layer or shorten the Song/folder
name to shorten the path (page 144).
The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display (page 138).
Recognizing an unformatted drive takes a few seconds after it is inserted. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
The Song you've edited becones a
Protected Song.
Registrations from another Protected Song have been called up on the
Electone. Initialize the Registration (page 120) then select the Song you want
to edit.
Registrations from Protected Song has been called up on the Electone.
Initialize the Registration (page 120) then start the operations you want such
as Registration edit/saving or Song recording.
Audio
Recording or playback cannot be performed.
A “Data could not be saved” message is shown and the recording is stopped.
• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The only compatible format is WAV.
The message will be shown when using the USB flash drive to which frequently recording/deleting operations have been applied. Format the USB flash drive
(page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, then try to use again.
11
208 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
PRODUCT NAME
TONE GENERATION
KEYBOARD
REGISTRATIONS
VOICE
EFFECT/
CONDITION
RHYTHMS
Keyboard Type
Initial Touch
After Touch
Registration Menu
Registration Memory
Registration Shift
Voice Sections
Voice Buttons Upper/Lower
Preset Voices
Preset Rhythm Patterns
Parts
Sections
Lead
Pedal
Rotary Speaker Control
Sustain
Reverb
Auto Bass Chord
Melody On Chord
Types
Depth
Voice Section Effects
Rhythm Buttons
DIGITAL ORGAN
AWM
Upper: 49 keys (C – C),
Lower: 49 keys (C – C),
Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
BASIC (FSB)
Upper, Lower
Upper, Lower
601
1 Unit 16 x 5
MEMORY, 1 – 16, DISABLE
Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1,
Pedal 2
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO,
ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1,
USER 2
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET,
USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1),
SOLO (Lead 2)
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1,
TO LOWER
540
2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2
Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2,
Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3,
Stage 1 – 2, XG Stage 1 – 2,
Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate,
White Room, Atmosphere Hall, Acoustic Room,
Drums Room, Percussion Room,
Tunnel, Canyon, Basement
Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion,
Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion
Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser,
Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+,
Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change,
Miscellaneous, Thru
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN,
WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
368 (including the metronome)
Main Drum, Add Drum
INTRO 1 – 3, ENDING 1 – 3, MAIN/FILL IN A – D, BREAK,
Auto Fill
Chord 1 – 2, Pad, Phrase 1 – 2
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Yes
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 209
11
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
CONTROLS
Settings
Kits
Assign
Footswitch Left
Expression Pedal
Transpose
Pitch
MIDI Control
MASTER VOLUME
MDR
Right
Audio Recording/Playback
Utility
Display Select
1 Unit
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40
Wonderland Kit, EL Kit, Standard Kit 1, Standard Kit 2,
Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit,
Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit,
Live! Studio Kit, House Kit, SFX Kit 1, SFX Kit 2,
Noise Kit, Pop Latin Kit, Arabic Kit, China Kit,
Orchestra Percussion
Yes
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker
Registration Shift
Yes
-6 – +6
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440 Hz
Yes
Yes
Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record,
Custom Play, Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit
Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete,
Conversion (XG format), Format, Information
Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo,
Pitch
Record: Stop, Record
Tools: Change Name, Delete
File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo)
Language (English/Japanese), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo),
LCD Contrast, Initialize
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY,
AUDIO
Full Dot LCD (128 x 64 dots), Monochrome
(20W + 10W) x 2
OTHERS Display
Sound System Power
Amplifiers
Speakers
Storage
Connectors
Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height),
Weight
Bench
Supplied Accessories
(16cm + 5cm) x 2
USB flash drive
PHONES
AUX OUT (VARIABLE, Standard phone): L/L+R, R
AUX IN (stereo mini phone)
MIDI IN/OUT
USB TO HOST
USB TO DEVICE x 2
1113mm x 493mm x 924mm (Depth and Height with music rest:
509mm x 1103mm),
50 kg
596mm x 296mm x 580mm, 6.2 kg
Owner’s Manual (this book),
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook,
Online Member Product Registration,
Music Rest, Dust Cover, Power Cord, Bench
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the
Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
210 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Index
Numerics
1 – 16 (Registration Memory)
9 – 16 (Registration Memory)
A
[A] – [D] button
.....................................25
A.B.C. (Auto Bass Chord)
Accompaniment
............................68
Add Drum
.............................................80
Adhoc Mode
.......................................196
AEM
......................................................42
After Touch
...........................................55
AMP SIMULATOR
Articulation
............................................59
Assembly Instructions
Assign
.................................................102
Audio
..................................................169
Audio Recording
................................169
Auto Articulation
............................42
Automatic Accompaniment
AUX IN
................................................182
AUX OUT
............................................182
[DISABLE] button
............................... 114
Disable mode
..................................... 114
display
.................................................. 25
Display Language
................................ 27
Display Page
........................................ 26
Display Select
...................................... 15
DISTORTION
................................. 57
DISTORTION+
.............................. 57
DYNAMIC
...................................... 57
E
Effect
............................................. 52
Effect List
............................................. 64
ENDING
............................................... 70
EQ/ENHANCER
............................. 57
ER/KARAOKE
................................ 57
Expression pedal
External
.............................................. 190
B
Bank
..........................................113
Bass Chord
...........................................82
BREAK
..................................................70
Brilliance
...............................................55
F
Fast Forward (audio)
.......................... 173
Fast Forward (Song)
.......................... 157
Feet
...................................................... 54
Files
.................................................... 131
FILL IN
.................................................. 70
Fingered Chord
.................................... 83
FLANGER
...................................... 57
Folders
...................................... 131
Footswitches
...................................... 177
Format
.................................................... 7
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized
....................................... 112
C
Channel Messages
.............................188
character
............................................145
Chord 1/Chord 2
...................................80
CHORUS
.......................................57
Computer
............................................186
Connections
.......................................182
Contrast of the Display
Controls
................................................52
Convert to XG
.....................................166
Copy
...................................................161
Creating folders
..................................165
Custom A.B.C.
......................................83
Custom Play
.......................................156
G
Glide
................................................... 179
GM
......................................................... 7
GS
.......................................................... 7
H
Headphones
........................................ 19
D
DATA CONTROL dial
DELAY
...........................................57
Delay (Vibrato)
......................................56
Delete (Song/Folder)
Deleting the File
..................................176
Depth (Reverb)
.....................................62
Depth (Vibrato)
.....................................56
I
ID
........................................................ 168
INFRASTRUCTURE
............................ 197
Initial Touch
.......................................... 55
Initialize the wireless LAN settings
Initializing Registration Memory
Initializing the Electone
Internal
............................................... 190
INTRO
.................................................. 70
J
Jacks and Controls
............................ 182
Jump
.................................................. 123
K
Keyboard
............................................. 29
Keyboard Percussion
Kit Assign List
.................................... 105
L language
.............................................. 27
LCD
...................................................... 25
Lead Voice
........................................... 29
Left Footswitch
................................... 177
Lower Keyboard
.................................. 30
Lower Keyboard Voice
M
M.O.C. (Melody On Chord)
MAIN
.................................................... 70
Main Drum
........................................... 80
Manual Setup
..................................... 195
MDR
................................................... 127
MDR Display
............................. 127
MDR Recording
................................. 138
Melody On Chord
................................ 85
Memory
................................................ 84
Metronome
.................................... 75
MIDI
.......................................... 183
MISCELLANEOUS
Mode (Rotary Speaker)
Music Data Recorder
N
Name
................................................. 144
Name (audio)
..................................... 176
networks
............................................ 194
Next Unit
................................... 126
Numbered buttons (Registration Memory)
........................................................ 111
O
On/Off status of the Voices
P
Pad
...................................................... 80
Page construction (MDR Display)
Panning
................................................ 54
Part (Rhythm)
....................................... 79
Pause (audio)
.................................... 173
Pause (Song)
..................................... 157
Pedal Voice
.......................................... 30
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 211
11
Pedalboard
PHASER
PHONES
...........................................30
.........................................57
.............................................182
Phrase 1/Phrase 2
................................80
Pitch (audio)
.......................................174
Pitch (overall)
......................................181
Pitch (Voice section)
.............................58
PITCH CHANGE
............................57
Playback (audio)
................................172
Playback (Song Parts)
Playback (Song)
.................................155
Power Supply
.......................................16
PRESET
................................................57
Preset (Vibrato)
.....................................56
Preset Keyboard Percussion
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
Priority
...................................................59
Protected Edit Song
...........................163
Protected Original Song
Protected Songs
.................................162
Punch-in Recording
............................143
R
Random
..............................................159
Recording (audio)
..............................169
Recording (MDR)
...............................138
Recording Each Part Separately
Registration Memory
Registration Menu
................................20
Registration Menu List
Registration Shift
................................121
Registrations (load from a USB flash drive)
..........................................................154
Registrations (memorize)
Registrations (recall)
Registrations (save to a USB flash drive)
................................................118
Remaining Memory
............................168
Repeat Playback
................................159
REVERB
.........................................57
Reverb (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm)
..............................................81
Reverb (Keyboard Percussion)
Reverb (Overall)
...................................61
Reverb (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
...........................................................74
Reverb (Voice)
......................................54
Rewind (audio)
...................................173
Rewind (Song)
....................................157
Rhythm
.................................................68
Rhythm buttons
....................................68
Rhythm Condition
Rhythm List
...........................................77
Rhythm Sequence
................................86
Right Footswitch
.................................177
ROTARY SPEAKER
Rotary Speaker
.....................................60
Rotary Speaker (Footswitch)
S
Save (Registration Memory)
Scroll bar
.............................................. 25
Selecting a Song
................................ 134
Shift
.................................................... 122
Shift End
............................................. 126
Single Finger
........................................ 83
Slide
..................................................... 59
Solo function
........................................ 39
Song
................................................... 155
Song (selection)
................................. 134
Song data size
................................... 168
Song icons
......................................... 130
SONG Page
....................................... 129
Speed (Rotary Speaker)
Speed (Vibrato)
.................................... 56
Speed Control
...................................... 60
START (Rhythm)
................................... 71
Stop (Shift End)
.................................. 126
Super Articulation
................................. 42
Sustain
................................................. 63
Synchro (MIDI)
................................... 190
SYNCHRO START
................................ 71
System Messages
.............................. 188
T
Tempo (audio)
.................................... 174
Tempo (MDR)
..................................... 158
Tempo (Rhythm)
.................................. 73
THRU
............................................. 57
Time (Reverb)
...................................... 62
To Lower function
................................. 38
Top (Shift End)
................................... 126
Touch Vibrato
....................................... 55
Transpose (overall)
............................ 181
Transpose (Voice section)
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
Tune
..................................................... 58
Type (Reverb)
...................................... 62
U
Unit
..................................................... 147
Units
................................................... 119
Upper Keyboard
.................................. 29
Upper Keyboard Voice
USB Device
........................................ 132
USB Flash Drives
............................... 132
USB TO DEVICE
................................ 183
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
USB TO HOST
.................................... 183
USB wireless LAN adaptor
User (Registration Shift)
User (Vibrato)
....................................... 56
User buttons (Rhythm)
User buttons (Voice)
............................ 39
User Keyboard Percussion
User rhythm
.......................................... 76
Utility
.................................................... 18
V
Version
................................................. 28
Vibrato
................................................. 56
Voice buttons
....................................... 33
Voice Condition
................................... 53
Voice Display
....................................... 31
Voice List
............................................. 42
Voice section 1
.................................... 33
Voice section 2
.................................... 36
[VOICE SECTION 2] button
Voice sections
..................................... 29
Voices
.................................................. 29
Volume
................................................. 17
Volume (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm)
............................................. 81
Volume (audio)
.................................. 174
Volume (Keyboard Percussion)
Volume (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
................................................... 69
Volume (Voice)
............................. 34
W
WAH
.............................................. 57
Wireless LAN Mode
........................... 197
Wireless LAN settings
WPS
................................................... 192
X
XG
.......................................................... 7
XG Songs
........................................... 160
212 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About Using BSD-Licensed Software
The software used by this product includes components that comply with the BSD license.
The restrictions placed on users of software released under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute such software in any form, with or without modification, they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of licensing provisions.
The following contents are displayed based on the licensing conditions described above, and do not govern your use of the product.
WPA Supplicant
Copyright © 2003-2009, Jouni Malinen <[email protected]> and contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL version 2 and BSD license. Either license may be used at your option.
License
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
XySSL
Copyright © 2006-2008, Christophe Devine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000
VENEZUELA
Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.
AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,
Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela
Tel: +58-212-943-1877
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-02-93577-1
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800
ICELAND
Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050
CROATIA
Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
AFRICA
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
CYPRUS
Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
ASIA
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Private Limited
Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,
Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,
Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com
DMI14 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
ZS53040
Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2016 MWZC*.*- **C0
Printed in Indonesia
ZS53040
advertisement
Key Features
- Natural sound and responsive touch
- Perfect for beginners and experienced players
- Versatile and easy-to-use
- Portable and rugged construction
- Great choice for gigging musicians